Safety Switches: Selection Criteria Prosafe Trapped Key

Safety Switches
Table of Contents
Safety Switches
Selection Criteria
Selection Flowchart ........................................................................................ 3-2 Selection Tips ................................................................................................. 3-3 Technology Overview ..................................................................................... 3-4
Prosafe Trapped Key

Overview ..................................................................................................... Rotary Switch ............................................................................................. Solenoid Release Unit ................................................................................ Electronic Timed-Delay Unit....................................................................... Stopped Motion Units ................................................................................ Exchange Units .......................................................................................... Bolt Interlocks............................................................................................. Access/Chains Interlocks ........................................................................... Slamlock ..................................................................................................... Miniature Valve Interlock ............................................................................ Switchgear Adaptors .................................................................................. Accessories ................................................................................................ 3-102 3-108 3-112 3-114 3-116 3-118 3-120 3-122 3-124 3-130 3-131 3-132
Interlock Overview
Versatility ........................................................................................................ 3-6 Accessories for Tongue and Guard Locking Switches .................................. 3-7 Product Selection ........................................................................................... 3-8 Safety Switches and Connectors................................................................... 3-9
Tongue Switches
Elf .............................................................................................................. Cadet 3 ..................................................................................................... Trojan T15 ................................................................................................. Trojan 5 & 6 ............................................................................................... MT-GD2 ........................................................................................................ 3-10 3-14 3-18 3-22 3-28
Safety Limit Switches IEC Style Switches

Overview ..................................................................................................... 22 mm Plastic............................................................................................. 30 mm Metal............................................................................................... 15 mm Plastic............................................................................................. 3-133 3-134 3-139 3-143
Guard Locking Switches

Overview ....................................................................................................... 3-33 440G-MT ...................................................................................................... 3-36 TLS-GD2....................................................................................................... 3-40 Atlas 5 ....................................................................................................... 3-46 Accessories for Interlock and Guard Locking Switches .............................. 3-50
NEMA Style Switches

802T Direct Opening Action ....................................................................... 3-145
Non-Contact Switches
Hinge Switches
Sprite......................................................................................................... 3-90 Ensign 3 .................................................................................................... 3-94 Rotacam.................................................................................................... 3-98
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs

R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-1
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
3-Interlock Switches
SensaGuard .............................................................................................. Ferrogard 1, 2, 20 & 21............................................................................. Ferrogard 3, 4 & 5 ..................................................................................... Ferrogard 6, 9, 10, 13 & 14....................................................................... Ferrogard GD2 .......................................................................................... Ferrogard GS1 & GS2 ............................................................................... Sipha Sensors...........................................................................................
3-56 3-70 3-74 3-76 3-80 3-84 3-86
2-Opto-electronics
1-
General
Safety Switches
Selection Flowchart
Prosafe Pro
General 12-Opto-electronics
Sequential Access Control?
Yes
No
Guard Locking
Does the machine have a long run down? (high inertia machine) No Yes
Non-Contact
Is it a washdown environment? Yes Or
Limit
No
3-Interlock Switches Operator Interface Logic Power
Type of Guard
Swinging
Sliding
Removable
Hard Guarding Light Guard

d Recommended Product Type Tongue Guard Locking Non-Contact Hinge
Light Guard
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-2
Safety Switches
Selection Tips
Sequential Access Control

A Sequential Access Control system requires that a predetermined sequence of events takes place or that hazards have been reduced before operators can become exposed to them. Prosafe trapped key interlocks are a mechanical system based on coded keys that achieves this via the premise that no single key can be used in two places at once. And because of their mechanical operation, Prosafe trapped key interlocks are widely used in applications where the location of plant, environment or explosive atmospheres make the use of electrical interlock systems unsuitable or expensive to install.
High Inertia Machine (Long Run Down Time)

A High Inertia Machine is one on which hazardous motion does not cease immediately when the safety measures are engaged. As a result, there is a possibility that an operator can reach the hazard while it is running down and is still dangerous. Interlock switches with guard locking reduce the risk that the guard opens during hazardous machine motion. Alternative measures: Install a braking device which stops the machine motion in a shorter time span. Increase the distance between the guard door and the hazard such that the operator cannot physically reach the hazard before it has stopped.
Washdown Environments
In many applications, primarily those in the pharmaceutical and food/beverage industries, frequent washdown of the machinery with water and/or cleaning fluids is common. Therefore, it is important to select a safety switch with the appropriate environmental protection as indicated by the products enclosure (Ingress Protection or IP) rating. Non-contact switches have no traps where debris can accumulate and are available in fully sealed versions (IP67/IP68/IP69K), making them ideal for washdown applications. For details on enclosure ratings, refer to the General section of this catalog (page G-9) and IEC 529.
Other Application Considerations

Non-Contact Switches Large Door Vibration Debris Washdown Misalignment Hinge Switches Tongue Switches Limit Switches

R
3-3
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
1-
General
Safety Switches
Technology Overview Tongue Interlock Switches

Features/Benefits
Tongue interlock switches are the most commonly used technology for door interlocking. They detect the movement of a guard using a key fitted to an opening in the switch body. Available in a variety of packages, contact configurations and degrees of holding force, these switches are generally the lowest-cost solution. The use of flexible keys also enhances tolerance to misalignment to address an even broader range of applications.
Applications
Wide range of doors
Common Misapplications
Washdown Heavy debris Cutting fluids Removable guards
Guard Locking Interlock Switches

Features/Benefits
Guard locking switches employ the same principle of operation as tongue interlocks, but feature an internal solenoid that locks the keyand therefore the guardin place until the machines power is isolated. Ideal for applications requiring controlled access to hazardous areas, guard locking switches are available in a variety of holding forces and with flexible actuators for optimal performance.
Applications
Printing presses Large access doors Saws/cutting blades High inertia machinery Web machines
Wet environments Improper holding force selected
Non-Contact Interlock Switches

Features/Benefits
Since there is no contact between actuator and switch, non-contact switches offer simple setup and alignment, less wear, and superior tamper-resistance as well as reduced installation cost. In addition, the IP67- and IP69K-sealed plastic or stainless steel housings make them ideal for food processing applications and other harsh environments.
Applications
Hinged doors A wide range of doors
Mounted at the door hinge Mounted to mild steel Exposed to rapid temperature changes
3-4
Safety Switches
Technology Overview Hinge Interlock Switches

Features/Benefits
Hinge switches are designed to fit at the hinge point of swinging guards. Because they do not use keys which must slide into a slot in the switch body, hinge switches are ideal for machines with misaligned doors or applications with contaminants that could be caught in a key slot. Offering a higher integrity level than standard tongue interlocks, hinge switches are difficult to defeat and can be adjusted for the opening angle of the door.
Applications
Hinged doors
Large doors Doors with poor hinge alignment
Features/Benefits
Available in a variety of actuators and contact configurations, safety position (limit) switches satisfy Machinery Directive requirements. 802T limit switches with direct opening action offer positive opening safety contacts in a rugged NEMA-style housing for use in control reliable and other safety applications, while 440P IEC limit switches provide safety function in a compact, economical package.
Applications
Conveyors Slide doors Muting sensors Robot positioning
Mounting a single limit switch on a guard door
Trapped Key Switches

Features/Benefits
Prosafe trapped-key interlock switches are designed to provide power isolation, key exchange and interlocking for safety applications requiring a pre-defined sequence of operations. Most of these rugged products do not require power to operate, making them ideal for applications in remote or intrinsically safe locations. Stainless steel construction also allows their use in harsh environments for process/valve control.
Applications
Sequencing/process control Intrinsic safety 1/4 turn valves
Duplicate coded keys on the plant floor

R
3-5
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
Limit Switches
1-
General
Safety Switches
Interlock Switches
Overview
Versatility
Many safety switches allow the head of the switch to rotate, offering different options on how the switch can be operated and mounted on the guard. This offers flexibility to best fit typical applications.
Elf, Cadet3, MT-GD2, 440G-MT
The head can be rotated 4 times at 90 allowing the key to fit the switch in 8 different positions.
Trojan T15, Trojan 5, Trojan 6 (Not GD2 Models)

The head rotates 180 allowing the key to fit the switch in 4 different positions: 2 in the front, 1 in the top and 1 in the back.
180
TLS-GD2
The head rotates 180 allowing the key to fit the switch in 4 different positions: 2 in the front, 1 in the top and 1 in the back.
Sprite, Ensign
180
The head can be rotated 4 times at 90 allowing the switch to be mounted in 4 different positions.
Operator Interface Logic Power

3-6
Safety Switches
Interlock Switches
Overview
Accessories for Tongue and Guard Locking Switches The correct actuator for your application
Standard: 90, Flat, Standard Flexible: Semi and Fully Specialty: Extended Flat and GD2 models
Standard type actuators accommodate most of the applications. Their design allows for the actuator and the switch to be mounted in different position and the guard to work properly. The flat actuator is mounted on small rubber blocks allowing for some play when the guard closes. The 90 is typically used on sliding doors. Flexible type actuators are used when doors are sagging or are not sturdy enough to guarantee insertion of the actuator always in-line with the opening of the switch. The flexible actuator allows for some motion of the actuator to "self align with the opening of the switch. Fully flexible actuators allow the actuator to move within a 15 angle in any direction. Semi-flexible actuators can be used for tight angles where the actuator enters the switch at an angle. This angle is adjustable on the actuator. The semi-flexible actuator moves only in a single plan direction.
GD2 actuators are dedicated actuators for GD2 models and are not suitable for use with standard models.

R
3-7
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
Extended flat type actuator is used mostly when the actuator is mounted on a chain and inserted in the switch. The guard is latched and the key is just inserted in the switch attached to a chain. When the door opens, the chain pulls the actuator activating the safety contacts.
2-Opto-electronics
1-
General
A large variety of tongue actuators are available:
Safety Switches
Interlock Switches
Overview
Product Selection
Description Elf Cadet 3 T15 T15 GD2 T5-T6 T5 GD2T6 GD2 MT-GD2 TLS GD2 Atlas 5 440GMT Cat. No.
Standard actuator
440K-A11095
Standard actuator
440K-A11238
Standard actuator
440G-A07136
GD2 standard actuator
440G-A27011
Flat actuator, not to be used with metal alignment guide
440K-A21014
GD2 flat actuator
440K-A11112
90 actuator, not to be used with metal alignment guide
440K-A21006
Fully flex actuator
440G-A27143
Fully flex actuator
440G-A07269
Extended flat actuator Metal alignment guide with semiflexible actuator Alignment guide with semi-flexible actuator
440K-A17116
440K-A21030
440K-A11144
Alignment guide with fully-flexible actuator
440K-A27010
Catch and Retainer Kit
440K-A11094
Replacement Alignment Guide
440K-A11115
3-8
Safety Switches
Interlock Switches
Overview
Safety Switches and Connectors
Many interlock switches are offered with connectors allowing easy installation and replacement on-site, reducing downtime. Standard cordsets and connectors can be used to connect these products directly to: Terminal Blocks Safety Distribution Boxes ArmorBlock Guard I/O (IP 67 Safety I/O Blocks on DeviceNet Safety)
Cordset Type of Connectors 4-Pin Micro (M12) 5-Pin Micro (M12) 6-Pin Micro (M12) 8-Pin Micro (M12) 12-Pin M23 Terminal Block Patchcord Safety Distribution Box ArmorBlock Guard I/O
Type of Connector by Product Family

Interlock Trojan Description 4-Pin Micro (M12) 6-Pin MIcro (M12) Connection to ArmorBlock Guard I/O 5-Pin Micro (M12) Other Connectors 8-Pin Micro (M12) 12-Pin M23 Elf Cadet T15 T5 T6 MT-GD2 TLS Atlas 5 440G-MT Connection to Distribution Box Guard Locking
Type of Connector by Product Family (continued)

Non-Contact Description 4-Pin Micro (M12) 6-Pin MIcro (M12) Connection to ArmorBlock Guard I/O 5-Pin Micro (M12) Other Connectors 8-Pin Micro (M12) 12-Pin M23 Note: All connectors on Safety Switches are male. SensaGuard Ferrogard 2, 20 21 6, 9, SS S3 Sipha SS S4 Sprite Ensign Rotacam 3 Hinge Cable Pull Lifeline 4 SS 4
Connection to Distribution Box
Connectors Ratings
Max. Ratings 4-Pin Micro (M12) 5-Pin Micro (M12) 6-Pin Micro (M12) 8-Pin Micro (M12) 12-Pin M23 250V, 4 A 60V, 4 A 30V, 2 A 30V, 2 A 63V, 6 A 250V, 4 A 60V, 4 A 30V, 2 A 30V, 2 A 63V, 6 A IEC 61076-2-101:2003 IEC 61076-2-101:2003 IEC 61076-2-101:2003 IEC 61076-2-101:2003 IEC 61984:2001 AC DC Applicable Standards

R
3-9
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
1-
General
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Elf
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems CE Marked for all applicable directives, cULus, TV, and CCC
General 1Description
The Elf is a tongue-operated (or key-operated) safety interlock switch designed to fit at the leading edge of sliding, hinged or lift-off guards. The Elf's unique miniature housing (only 75 x 25 x 29 mm (2.95 x 0.98 x 1.14 in.)) makes it the smallest interlock currently available. It is designed for smaller machines such as printers, copiers and domestic machinery which, until now, have been unable to use safety interlocks due to space restrictions. With its dual entry slots and rotatable head, the versatile Elf can offer up to eight different actuator entry options. Operation of the switch is achieved through the insertion of a specially-profiled stainless-steel key that is permanently mounted to the guard door. The semi-flexible key allows the Elf to be used on small-radii doors (60 mm or 2.36 in.). The Elf is available with a variety of contact configurations, conduit entry types and connectors. It is sealed to IP67 (watertight and dustproof). A blanking plug is supplied for the unused key entry.
Safety Classification Certifications Outputs Safety Contacts Direct Opening Action Auxiliary Contacts Thermal CurrentIlth Rated Insulation Voltage Switching Current @ Voltage, Min. Utilization Category A600/AC-15 DC-13 Operating Characteristics Break Contact Force, Min. Actuation Speed, Max. Actuation Frequency, Max. Operating Radius, Min Operating Life @ 100 mA load Environmental Enclosure Type Rating Operating Temperature [C (F)] Physical Characteristics Housing Material Actuator Material Weight [g (oz)] Color
1 N.C. 1 N.O. 5 A (10 A if A600) 2500V 5 mA @ 5V DC 500V 1.4 A
2 N.C. None
(Ue) 600V (le) 1.2 A (Ue) 24V (le) 2 A
240V 3.0 A
120V 6.0 A
2-Opto-electronics
6 N (1.35 lbf) 160 mm (6.29 in.)/s 2 cycles/s 150 mm (5.90 in.) [60 mm (2.36 in.) with GD2 kit, min.] 1 x 106 operations IP67 -20+80 (-4+176) UL Approved glass-filled PBT Stainless Steel 60 (2.11) Red
Features
Ideal for small, lightweight guards The smallest interlock switch available Contacts, 2 N.C. or 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. Eight possible actuator entry points, easy to install Environmental protection: IP67 GD2 style available for demanding applications
1 Usable for ISO 13849-1:2006 and IEC 62061. Data other than B10d is
based on: - Usage rate of 1op/10 mins., 24 hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing 51840 operations per year - Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years The safety contacts are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be started.
3-10
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Elf
Product Selection
Cat. No. Connect to Distribution Box 4-Pin Micro (M12) 440K-E33074 440K-E33025 440K-E33075 440K-E33076 440K-E33077 440K-E33024 440K-E33078 440K-E33079 Connect to ArmorBlock Guard I/O 5-Pin Micro (M12) 440K-E2NNFPS 440K-E2NNAPS
Safety
Auxiliary
Action
Actuator Type Flat 90
M16 440K-E33036
440K-E33040
1/2 inch NPT Adaptor 440K-E33029 440K-E33030 440K-E33031 440K-E33053 440K-E33037 440K-E33045 440K-E33046
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
GD2 Metal alignment guide w/semi-flex actuator Flat 90
440K-E33034 440K-E33014 440K-E33080

440K-E33041
2 N.C.
GD2 Metal alignment guide w/semi-flex actuator
440K-E33047
Recommended Logic Interfaces

Description MSR127RP MSR127TP MSR30RT Safety Outputs 3 N.O. 3 N.O. 2 N.O. Solid State Auxiliary Outputs 1 N.C. 1 N.C. 1 N.O. Solid State Terminals Removable (Screw) Removable (Screw) Removable Reset Type Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Auto. or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Monitored Manual Power Supply 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 24V DC Cat. Page No. 5-24 5-24 5-16 Cat. No. 440R-N23135 440R-N23132 440R-N23198 Single-Function Safety Relays for 2 N.C. Contact Switch
Single-Function Safety Relays for 1 N.C. & 1 N.O. Contact Switch MSR9T MSR33RT 2 N.O. 2 N.O. Solid State 1 N.C. 1 N.O. Fixed Removable 24V AC/DC 24V DC SELV 5-14 5-18 440R-F23027 440R-F23200
Modular Safety Relays MSR210P Base 2 N.C. only MSR220P Input Module MSR310P Base MSR320P Input Module 2 N.O. MSR300 Series Output Modules 1 N.C. and 2 PNP Solid State 3 PNP Solid State 2 PNP Solid State Removable Removable Removable Removable 24V DC from the base unit 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC from the base unit 5-74 5-78 5-94 5-98 440R-H23176 440R-H23178 440R-W23219 440R-W23218
Note: For additional Safety Relays connectivity, see the Safety Relays section (page 5-8) of this catalog. For additional Safety I/O and Safety PLC connectivity, see the Programmable Safety System section (page 5-107) of this catalog. For application and wiring diagrams, see the Safety Applications section (page 10-1) of this catalog.
Connection Systems
Connection to Distribution Box 4-Pin Micro (M12) Description Cordset Patchcord Distribution Box Shorting Plug T-Port 1 N.C. & 1 N.O. 889D-F4AC-1 889D-F4ACDM898D-P4KT-DM4 898D-41KU-DM 898D-43KY-D4 2 N.C. 889D-F4AC-1 889D-F4ACDM898D-4LT-DM4 898D-41LU-DM 898D-43LY-D4 Connection to ArmorBlock Guard I/O 5-Pin Micro (M12) 2 N.C. 889R-F5ECRM-1
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths. Replace symbol with 4 or 8 for number of ports. Note: For additional information, see the Safety Connection System section (page 7-1) of this catalog.

R
3-11
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
For connector ratings see page 3-9. With a 5-pin micro (M12) connector, not all contacts are connected. See Typical Wiring Diagram on page 3-13 for wiring details.
1-
General
Contact
M16 Conduit
Connector
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Elf
Accessories
Description Dimensions Cat. No.
4.5 (0.18)
4 (0.16)
29 (1.14)
6 (0.24)
12.5 (0.49)
12.5 (0.49)
18 (0.71)
16.5 (0.65)
25 (0.98)
3 (0.12) 34.5 (1.36) 36 (1.42)
3-12
13 (0.51)
6 (0.24)
3-52
440K-A21014
3-52
440K-A21006
Metal alignment guide with semi-flexible actuator
3-52
440K-A21030
Metal Alignment Guide
3-52
440K-A21069
Replacement Cover
440A-A33085
Dust Cover
440K-A17182
Approximate Dimensions
Dimensions are shown in mm (in.). Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
25 (0.98) 75 (2.95)
75 (2.95)
13 (0.51)
17.5 (0.69) 4 (0.16) 2 x M4 4.5 (0.18)
1 x M16
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Elf
Typical Wiring Diagrams
Description 1 N.C. & 1 N.O. 2 N.C.
Contact Configuration
11 23 12 24
Safety A (NC) Aux A (NO) 3.3 0 mm
11 21
12 22
Safety A (NC) Safety B (NC)
3.8
Open
Closed
BBM 2-Aux A 2-Safety B 1-Safety A 4-Safety B 5-Safety B 2-Safety A 1-Safety A 3-N/A 4-Safety B 3-Safety A
4-Pin Micro (M12)
1-Safety A 4-Aux A
3-Safety A
5-Pin Micro (M12) For ArmorBlock Guard I/O
Brown
Cordset 889D-F4AC-1
Blue White Black
Safety A Aux A
Safety A Safety B
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m) or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.

R
3-13
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
1-
Contact Action
Safety A Aux A
6 Safety A Safety B
3.3
0 mm
General
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Cadet 3
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 device per EN 954-1 dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems CE Marked for all applicable directives, cULus, TV, and CCC
The Cadet 3 is a tongue-operated (or key-operated) safety interlock switch designed to fit at the leading edge of sliding, hinged or lift-off guards. With its dual entry slots and rotatable head, the versatile Cadet 3 can offer up to eight different actuator entry options. The unique compact housing (90.5 x 31 x 30.4 mm (3.56 x 1.22 x 1.19 in.)) has industry standard DIN 50047 fixing centers for ease of mounting. Operation of the switch is achieved through the insertion of a specially-profiled stainless-steel key that is permanently mounted to the guard door. A semi-flexible key allows the Cadet 3 to be used on small-radii doors (60 mm or 2.36 in.). Available with a variety of contact configurations, the Cadet 3 is sealed to IP67. A blanking plug is supplied for the unused key entry.
Safety Classification Certifications Outputs Safety Contacts Direct Opening Action Auxiliary Contacts Thermal CurrentIlth Rated Insulation Voltage Switching Current @ Voltage, Min. Utilization Category A600/AC-15 DC-13 Operating Characteristics Break Contact Force, Min. Actuation Speed, Max. Actuation Frequency, Max. Operating Radius, Min Operating Life @ 100 mA load Environmental Enclosure Type Rating
2 N.C. 1 N.O. 10 A (Ui) 500V 5 mA @ 5V DC 500V 1.4 A
3 N.C. None
(Ue) 600V (le) 1.2 A (Ue) 24V (le) 2 A
240V 3.0 A
120V 6.0 A
2-Opto-electronics
15 N (3.37 lbf) 160 mm (6.29 in.)/s 2 cycles/s 150 mm (5.90 in.) [60 mm (2.36 in.) with GD2 kit] 1 x 106 operations IP67 -20+ 80 (-4+176) UL Approved glass-filled PBT Stainless Steel 80 (0.176) Red
Features
Compact size Ideal for small, lightweight guards Contacts, 2 N.C. and 1 N.O. or 3 N.C. Sealed to IP67 Eight possible actuator entry points, easy to install Industry standard fixing centres to DIN 50047 GD2 style available for demanding applications
Operating Temperature [C (F)] Physical Characteristics Housing Material Actuator Material Weight [g (lb)] Color
3-14
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Cadet 3
Product Selection
Contact M16 Conduit Cat. No. Connect to Distribution Box 6-Pin Micro (M12) 440K-C21090 440K-C21091 440K-C21092 440K-C21054 440K-C21067
440K-C21088
Safety
Auxiliary
Action
Actuator Type Flat 90
M16 440K-C21096 440K-C21097 440K-C21070 440K-C21098

440K-C21061
1/2 inch NPT Adaptor 440K-C21048 440K-C21057 440K-C21062 440K-C21050 440K-C21058

440K-C21074
Connect to ArmorBlock Guard I/O 5-Pin Micro (M12) 440K-C2NNFPS 440K-C2NNAPS
3 N.C.
BBM
440K-C21055 440K-C21052 440K-C21065 440K-C21080
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
440K-C21093 440K-C21094 440K-C21095
440K-C21060 440K-C21068 440K-C21089
MBB
GD2 Metal alignment guide w/semi-flex actuator
For connector ratings see page 3-9. With a 5-pin micro (M12) connector, not all contacts are connected. See Typical Wiring Diagram on page 3-17 for wiring details.

Description MSR127RP MSR127TP MSR126T MSR30RT Safety Outputs 3 N.O. 3 N.O. 2 N.O. 2 N.O. Solid State Auxiliary Outputs 1 N.C. 1 N.C. None 1 N.O. Solid State Terminals Removable (Screw) Removable (Screw) Fixed Removable Reset Type Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Auto./Manual Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Monitored Manual Power Supply 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 24V DC Cat. Page No. 5-24 5-24 5-22 5-16 Cat. No. 440R-N23135 440R-N23132 440R-N23117 440R-N23198 Single-Function Safety Relays
Connection Systems
Cordset Patchcord Distribution Box Shorting Plug T-Port
889R-F6ECA-1 889R-F6ECRM898R-P68MT-A5 898R-P61MU-RM NA
889R-F5ECRM-1
Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths. Note: For additional information, see the Safety Connection System section (page 7-1) of this catalog.

R
3-15
Power
Logic
Description
6-Pin Micro (M12)
5-Pin Micro (M12)
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
1-
General
Connector
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Cadet 3
Accessories
Description Dimensions Flat actuator, not to be used with metal alignment guide Cat. No.
2 0.0 ( 0.79 )
31.0 (1.22)
4.5 (0.18) R 2.15 4 (0.16)
M16 Thread Form
25.0 ( 0. 98 )
1 3.0 ( 0.51 )
22.0 ( 0. 87)
4 (0.16) 13.0 (0.51) 4.5 (0.18) 13.0 (0.51)
Note: 2D, 3D and electrical drawings are available on www.ab.com.
3-16
25.0 (0.98) 30.4 (1.2)
440K-A21014
3-52
440K-A21006
440K-A21030
Replacement Cover
440A-A21115
Dust Cover
440K-A17182
90.5 (3.56) 38.4 (1.51) 36.4 (1.43) 34.4 (1.35) Front Entry
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Cadet 3
11 21 33 12 22 34
Safety A (NC) Safety B (NC) Aux A (NO)
11 21 31
12 22 32
Safety A (NC) Safety B (NC) Safety C (NC)
Contact Action
Safety A Safety B Aux A 3.7 BBM 3.5 0 mm Safety A Safety B Safety C 2.5 MBB 3-Aux A 6-Safety B 2-Safety B 3-Safety C 4-Safety C 1-Safety A 5-Safety A 5-Safety B 1-Safety A 2-Safety A 1-Safety A 3-N/A 4-Safety B Red/White Red/Black Safety A Safety B Aux A Safety A Safety B Safety C 6-Safety B 2-Safety B Safety A Safety B Aux A 3.1 0 mm
Open
Closed
6-Pin Micro (M12)
4-Aux A 5-Safety A
Cordset 889R-F6ECA-1
Red Red/Blue Green Red/Yellow

R
3-17
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
5-Pin Micro (M12)
2-Opto-electronics
1-
3.1
0 mm
General
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Trojan T15
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 device per EN 954-1 dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems CE Marked for all applicable directives, cULus, TV, and CCC
The Trojan T15 is a compact universal tongue-operated (or keyoperated) safety interlock switch designed to fit at the leading edge of sliding, hinged or lift-off guards. With its dual entry slots and rotatable head, movable only by releasing the cover screws, the Trojan T15 can offer four different options for actuator entry. The Trojan T15 features a compact housing, only 75 x 52 x 32 mm (2.95 x 2.04 x 1.25 in.) and includes direct opening action contacts and a tamper-resistant mechanism. The Trojan T15 has 2 N.C. safety contacts or 1 N.C. safety contact and 1 N.O. auxiliary contact. The unit is sealed to IP67 and has three M20 conduit entries. Operation of the switch is achieved by the insertion of the speciallyprofiled stainless-steel actuator which should be permanently fixed to the leading edge of the guard door. The standard T15 incorporates actuator retention force of 30N. An optional catch mechanism helps keep doors shut on vibrating machinery.
Safety Classification Certifications Outputs Safety Contacts Direct Opening Action Auxiliary Contacts Thermal CurrentIlth Rated Insulation Voltage Utilization Category A600/AC-15 (Ue) (le) DC-13 (Ue) (le) Operating Characteristics Break Contact Force, Min. Actuation Speed, Max. Actuation Frequency, Max. Operating Radius, Min Operating Life @ 100 mA load Environmental Enclosure Type Rating Operating Temperature [C (F)] Physical Characteristics Housing Material Actuator Material Weight [g (lb)] Color
2 N.C. None 10 A (Ui) 500V
1 N.C. 1 N.O.
Switching Current @ Voltage, Min. 5 mA @ 5V DC (Ue) 600V (le) 1.2 A (Ue) 24V (le) 2 A 30 N (6.70 lbf) 160 mm (6.29 in.)/s 2 cycles/s 175 mm (6.89 in.) [60 mm (2.36 in.) with flexible actuator] 1 x 106 operations IP67 -20+80 (-4+176) UL Approved glass-filled PBT Stainless Steel 120 (0.265) Red 500V 1.4 A 240V 3.0 A 120V 6.0 A
2-Opto-electronics
Features
Compact size, 75 x 52 x 32 mm (2.95 x 2.05 x 1.26 in.) case 30 N actuator retention force Strong and versatile, can be used in most applications Contacts: 2 N.C. safety or 1 N.C. safety & 1 N.O. auxillary GD2 style available for demanding applications
3-18
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Trojan T15
Product Selection
Cat. No. Connect to Distribution Box 4-Pin Micro (M12) 440K-T11307 440K-T11384 440K-T11385 440K-T11386 440K-T11387 440K-T11388 440K-T11389 440K-T11390 440K-T11391 440K-T11392 440K-T11393 440K-T11394 Connect to ArmorBlock Guard I/O 5-Pin Micro (M12) 440K-V2NNSPS 440K-V2NNBPS 440K-V2NNGPS-NG
Type
Safety 2 N.C.
Auxiliary
Contact Action
Actuator Type Standard Fully-Flex Standard
M20 440K-T11303 440K-T11395

440K-T11269
1/2 inch NPT Adaptor 440K-T11267 440K-T11273 440K-T11268 440K-T11276 440K-T11288 440K-T11287 440K-T11284 440K-T11283
Trojan T15 Standard 1 N.C. 1 N.O. BBM
440K-T11305 440K-T11396 440K-T11270 440K-T11463 440K-T11397 440K-T11280 440K-T11398 440K-T11399 440K-T11279
Fully-Flex GD2 Standard
2 N.C. Trojan T15 GD2 1 N.C.
Fully-Flex GD2 Standard
1 N.O.
BBM
Fully-Flex
For connector ratings see page 3-9.

Description MSR127RP MSR127TP MSR30RT Safety Outputs 3 N.O. 3 N.O. 2 N.O. Solid State Auxiliary Outputs 1 N.C. 1 N.C. 1 N.O. Solid State Terminals Removable (Screw) Removable (Screw) Removable Reset Type Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Auto. or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Monitored Manual Power Supply 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 24V DC Cat. Page No. 5-24 5-24 5-16 Cat. No. 440R-N23135 440R-N23132 440R-N23198 Single-Function Safety Relays for 2 N.C. Contact Switch
Connection Systems
Connection to Distribution Box 4-Pin Micro (M12) Description Cordset Patchcord Distribution Box Shorting Plug T-Port 2 N.C. 889D-F4AC-1 889D-F4ACDM898D-4LT-DM4 898D-41LU-DM 898D-43LY-D4 1 N.C. & 1 N.O. 889D-F4AC-1 889D-F4ACDM898D-P4KT-DM4 898D-41KU-DM 898D-43KY-D4 Connection to ArmorBlock Guard I/O 5-Pin Micro (M12) 2 N.C. 889D-F5ACDM-1

R
3-19
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
1-
General
Contact
M20 Conduit
Connector
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Trojan T15
Accessories
Description To Be Used With: Dimensions Cat. No.
40 (1.57)
5.5 (0.22) 2 x M5 3 x M20 5 (0.2) GD2
32 (1.26)
33.4 (1.31) 41 (1.61) 75 (2.95)
3-20
5.5 (0.22)
15 (0.59)
13 (0.51)
16 (0.62)
31 (1.22)
52 (2.05)
20.5 (0.81)
5 (0.2)
Standard actuator
Trojan T15 Standard Models Only
3-51
440K-A11238
Trojan GD2 Models Only
3-50
440G-A27011
GD2 flat actuator
Trojan GD2 Models Only 3-51
440K-A11112
Alignment guide with semi-flexible actuator
Discard Alignment Guide for GD2 Models
440K-A11144
3-52
440K-A27010
Sliding bolt actuator
Trojan GD2 Models Only
3-55
440G-A27163
Trojan T15 Standard Models Only
3-50
440K-A11094
Replacement Cover
All Models
440A-A11499
Dust Cover
All Models
440K-A17180
Operator Interface Logic Power
20.5 (0.81)
15.75 (0.62)
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Trojan T15
11 23 12 24
Safety A (NC) Aux A (NO)

15 10 6 0 mm
11 21
12 22
Safety A (NC) Safety B (NC)
Contact Action Open Closed
Safety A Aux A
20
15
10
0 mm
BBM 2-Aux A
Safety A Safety B
2-Safety B 1-Safety A 4-Safety B 5-Safety B 2-Safety A 1-Safety A 3-N/A 4-Safety B 3-Safety A
4-Aux A
Brown
Black
Aux A
Safety B

R
3-21
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
Cordset 889D-F4AC-1
Blue White
Safety A
Safety A
2-Opto-electronics
4-Pin Micro (M12)
1-Safety A
3-Safety A
1-
20
General
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Trojan 5 & 6
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 602041, NFPA 79, EN 1088, ISO 14119, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS 4024.1 Cat. 1 device per EN 954-1 dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. load PFHD: > 3 x10-7 MTTFd: > 385 years Dual channel interlock may be suitable for performance levels Ple or Pld (according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according to IEC 62061) depending on application characteristics CE Marked for all applicable directives, cULus, TV, and CCC
The Trojan family is a universal tongue-operated (or key-operated) safety-interlock switch designed to fit at the leading edge of sliding, hinged or lift-off guards. The dual key entry slots and rotatable head, movable only by releasing the cover screws, allow four actuator entry options. The Trojan contains all of the safety related functionsi.e., forced guided contacts, tamper resistant mechanismallowing the machine to be safeguarded in compliance with the machine directive. Operation of the switch is achieved through the insertion of a specially-profiled stainless-steel key that is permanently mounted to the leading edge of the guard door. The standard (not GD2) Trojan actuator includes a self-ejecting mechanism that prevents operation of the switch if the actuator is not mounted to the guard door (e.g., if the operator uses a spare key).
Safety Classification
Functional Safety Data 1 Note: For up-to-date information, visit http://www.ab.com/Safety/
Certifications Outputs Safety Contacts Direct Opening Action Auxiliary Contacts Thermal CurrentIlth Rated Insulation Voltage Switching Current @ Voltage, Min. Utilization Category Trojan 5 A300/AC-15 DC-13 Trojan 6 A600/AC-15 DC-13 Operating Characteristics Break Contact Force, Min. Actuation Speed, Max.
3 N.C. 1 N.O. 10 A (Ui) 500V
2 N.C. 2 N.O.
2 N.C. 1 N.O.
2-Opto-electronics
5 mA @ 5V DC
(Ue) 240V (le) 3 A (Ue) 24V (le) 2 A
120V 6A 24V
Features
Strong and versatile, can be used in most applications Self-ejecting tamper resistant actuator, only operates when mounted to the guard (not with GD2 models) Four possible actuator entry points, easy to install GD2 style available for demanding applications
(Ue) 600V (le) 1.2 A (Ue) 24V (le) 2 A
500V 1.4 A
240V 3A
120V 6A
Trojan 5: 12 N (2.7 lbf) & 30 N (6.75 lbf) Trojan 6: 20 N (4.5 lbf) 160 mm (6.29 in.)/s 2 cycles/s 175 mm (6.89 in.) [60 mm (2.36 in.) with flexible actuator] 1 x 106 operations IP67 -20+80 (-4+176) UL Approved glass-filled PBT Stainless Steel 160 (0.35) Red
Actuation Frequency, Max. Operating Radius, Min Operating Life @ 100 mA load Environmental Enclosure Type Rating Operating Temperature [C (F)] Physical Characteristics Housing Material Actuator Material Weight [g (lb)] Color
3-22
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Trojan 5 & 6
Product Selection
Cat. No. Connect to Distribution Box 6-Pin Micro (M12) 440K-T11205 440K-T11206 440K-T11207 440K-T11129 440K-T11224 440K-T11363 440K-T11364 440K-T11365 440K-T11366 440K-T11367 440K-T11368 440K-T11226 440K-T11369 440K-T11370 440K-T11371 440K-T11372 440K-T11492 Connect to ArmorBlock Guard I/O 5-Pin Micro (M12) 440K-T2NNBPS
Type
Safety
Auxiliary
Action
Actuator Type Standard Guide/SemiFlex Guide/FullyFlex
M20
440K-T11090
1/2 inch NPT Adaptor

440K-T11202
440K-T11110
440K-T11467 440K-T11089
440K-T11203 440K-T11204 440K-T11208 440K-T11209 440K-T11210 440K-T11469 440K-T11211 440K-T11212 440K-T11213 440K-T11470 440K-T11471 440K-T11472 440K-T91024
BBM
Standard Guide/SemiFlex Guide/FullyFlex GD2 Standard Guide/SemiFlex Guide/FullyFlex GD2 Standard Guide/SemiFlex Guide/FullyFlex Trojan 5 30 N BBM Standard
440K-T11118
440K-T11123 440K-T11468 440K-T11146 440K-T11336 440K-T11337 440K-T11338

440K-T11147
MBB 2 N.C. 1 N.O.
BBM
Trojan 5 GD2
440K-T11339 440K-T11340 440K-T11341 440K-T11167 440K-T11333
MBB
For connector ratings see page 3-9. With a 5-pin micro (M12) connector, not all contacts are connected. See Typical Wiring Diagram on page 3-27 for wiring details. Cat. No. Contact Type Safety 3 N.C. Trojan 6 2 N.C. 2 N.O. Auxiliary 1 N.O. Action BBM BBM MBB 3 N.C. Trojan 6 GD2 2 N.C. 2 N.O. 1 N.O. BBM MBB BBM MBB Actuator Type Standard Standard GD2 Standard GD2 Standard M20 440K-T11171 440K-T11449 440K-T11174 440K-T11452 440K-T11453 440K-T11418 440K-T11188 440K-T11456 440K-T11445 440K-T11459 440K-T11460 M20 Conduit 1/2 inch NPT Adaptor 440K-T11435 440K-T11408 440K-T11438 440K-T11416 440K-T11454 440K-T11466 440K-T11444 440K-T11457 440K-T11425 440K-T11433 440K-T11461 Connector 8-Pin Micro (M12) 440K-W21BNPH 440K-W21MNPH 440K-W21BNPH-NG 440K-W21MNPH-NG
For connector ratings see page 3-9. With an 8-pin micro (M12) connector, not all contacts are connected. See Typical Wiring Diagram on page 3-27 for wiring details.

R
3-23
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
440K-T2NNGPS-NG
1-
Trojan 5 Standard
BBM Gold Contacts
Standard
440K-T11085
General
Contact
M20 Conduit
Connector
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Trojan 5 & 6
Description Safety Outputs Auxiliary Outputs Terminals Removable (Screw) Removable (Screw) Fixed Removable Reset Type Power Supply Cat. Page No. Cat. No. Single-Function Safety Relays MSR127RP MSR127TP MSR126T MSR30RT 3 N.O. 3 N.O. 2 N.O. 1 N.C. 1 N.C. None Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Auto./Manual Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Monitored Manual 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 24V DC 5-24 5-24 5-22 5-16 440R-N23135 440R-N23132 440R-N23117 440R-N23198
2 N.O. Solid State 1 N.O. Solid State
Connection Systems
Trojan 5 Description Cordset Patchcord Distribution Box Shorting Plug T-Port 5-Pin Micro (M12) 889R-F5ECRM-1 6-Pin Micro (M12) 889R-F6ECA-1 889R-F6ECRM898R-F68MT-A5 898R-P61MU-RM Trojan 6 8-Pin Micro (M12) 889D-F8AB-1 889D-F8ABDM
3-24
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Trojan 5 & 6
Accessories
Description To Be Used With: Dimensions Cat. No.
Standard actuator
Trojan T5 and T6 Standard Models Only
3-51
440K-A11095
GD2 Models Only
3-50
440G-A27011
GD2 flat actuator
GD2 Models Only
3-51
440K-A11112
3-51
440K-A11144
GD2 Models Only
3-55
440G-A27163
Trojan T5 and T6 Standard Models Only
3-50
440K-A11094
Trojan T5 Standard Models Only Replacement Cover Trojan T5 GD2 Trojan T6 Standard Models Only Trojan T6 GD2 Dust Cover All Models
440A-A11495 440A-A11496 440A-A11497 440A-A11498 440K-A17180

R
3-25
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
3-52
440K-A27010
1-
General
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Trojan 5 & 6
Standard Model End Entry
32 (1.26)
5 (0.2)
15.75 (0.62)
9 (0.35)
3 (0.12)
15.75 (0.62)
20.5 (0.81)
3 (0.12)
5 (0.2)
95 (3.74)
24 (0.94) 5 (0.2) 5.5 (0.22) Front Entry
52 (2.05)
20.5 (0.81)
40 (1.57)
15.75 (0.62) 46 (1.81) 7 (0.28) Mounting Holes for M5 Screws 8 (0.31)
GD2 Model
32 (1.26) End Entry 32 (1.26)
5 (0.2) 14 (0.55) 15.75 (0.62) 20.5 (0.81) 3 (0.12) 5.5 (0.22) 24 (0.94) 9 (0.35)
36 (1.42)
3 (0.12)
95 (3.74) 5 (0.2)
5 (0.2)
5.5 (0.22) Front Entry
52 (2.05)
20.5 40 (0.81) (1.57)
15.75 (0.62) 46 (1.81) 7 (0.28) Note: 2D, 3D and electrical drawings are available on www.ab.com. Mounting Holes for M5 Screws 8 (0.31)
3-26
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Trojan 5 & 6
Trojan 5 Description 2 N.C. & 1 N.O. 2 N.C. & 2 N.O. Trojan 6
11
11 21 33 12 22 34
12 22 34 44
Safety A Safety B Aux A Aux B
11 21 31 43
12 22 32 44
Safety A Safety B Safety C Aux A
Safety A
21
Safety B
33
Aux A
43
20
15
10 4.8
0mm
Contact Action
Safety A Safety B Aux A 5.2
Safety A Safety B Aux A Aux B 3.8
Safety A Safety B Safety C Aux A 4.5
BBM
20 15 10 4.5 0mm 20 Safety A Safety B Aux A Aux B Safety A Safety B Aux A 4.2
BBM
15 10 4.5 0mm Safety A Safety B Safety C Aux B 4.0 20
BBM
15 10 4.5 0mm
Open
Closed
4.0
MBB 3-Aux A 6-Safety B 2-Safety B
MBB
MBB
6-Pin Micro (M12)
4-Aux A 5-Safety A 5-Safety B 1-Safety A 2-Safety A 1-Safety A 3-NA 4-Safety B 3-NA 8-Safety A
5-Pin Micro (M12) for ArmorBlock Guard I/O
2-NA 1-Aux A 7-Aux A 6-Safety B Safety A Safety B Aux A NA
8-Pin Micro (M12)
4-Safety B 5-Safety A
Red/White Red/Black
Safety A Safety B Aux
6-Pin Cordset 889R-F6ECA-1
Red Red/Blue Green Red/Yellow Grey Red
8-Pin Cordset 889D-F8AB-1
Yellow Pink White Blue Green Brown

R
3-27
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
1-
20
15
10
3.2 0mm
20
15
10
4.0 0mm
General
3 N.C. & 1 N.O.
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
MT-GD2
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 device per EN 954-1 dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. load PFHD: > 3 x10-7 MTTFd: > 385 years Dual channel interlock may be suitable for performance levels Ple or Pld (according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according to IEC 62061) depending on application characteristics CE Marked for all applicable directives, cULus, TV, and CCC Standard: 3 N.C. or 2 N.C. direct opening action Snap acting: 2 N.C. direct opening forced disconnection Standard: 1 N.O. or 2 N.O. Snap Acting: 2 N.O. 10 A (Ui) 500V
The MT-GD2 family is a robust, tongue-operated (or key-operated) safety-interlock switch designed to fit at the leading edge of sliding, hinged or lift-off guards. With its dual entry slots and rotatable head, the MT-GD2 can offer eight different options for actuator entry. The MT-GD2 features a compact housing of only 117 x 40 x 43 mm (4.60 x 1.57 x 1.69 in.) with DIN 50041 standard fixing centres and includes forced guided contacts and a tamper-resistant mechanism. The MT-GD2 is available with a variety of contact configurations enabling it to be used as part of a system for higher-risk applications. Operation of the switch is achieved by the insertion of the specially-profiled stainless-steel actuator which should be permanently fixed to the leading edge of the guard door. An optional flexible actuator allows the MT-GD2 to operate on smaller-radii doors (60 mm) and a flat actuator gives additional mounting options, for example, on a chain. A style incorporating a latch release mechanism allows manual retention of the actuator in the switch until the release mechanism is manually activated.
Certifications Outputs Safety Contacts
2-Opto-electronics
Auxiliary Contacts Thermal CurrentIlth Rated Insulation Voltage Utilization Category A600/AC-15 StandardDC-13 Snap-ActingA300/AC-15 Snap-ActingDC-13 Operating Characteristics Break Contact Force, Min. Actuation Speed, Max. Actuation Frequency, Max. Operating Life @ 100 mA load Environmental Enclosure Type Rating
Switching Current @ Voltage, Min. 5 mA @ 5V DC (Ue) 600V (le) 1.2 A (Ue) 24V (le) 2 A (Ue) 240V (le) 3 A (Ue) 24V (le) 2 A 120V 6A 500V 1.4 A 240V 3A 120V 6A
Features
Strong and versatile, can be used in most applications Eight possible actuator entry points, easy to install Variety of contact configurations Snap acting MT-GD2 gives a min. break contact force of 40 N Optional latch release styles Industry standard fixing centers to DIN/EN50041
BBM & MBB: 12 N (2.7 lbf) BBM & Extended Flat Actuator: 32 N (7.2 lbf) Snap acting: 40 N (9.0 lbf) 160 mm (6.29 in.)/s 2 cycles/s 1 x 106 operations IP67 -20+80 (-4+176) Painted zinc Stainless Steel 520 (1.15) Yellow or Red
MT-GD2 Latch Release Style
Operating Temperature [C (F)] Physical Characteristics Housing Material Actuator Material Weight [g (lb)] Color
3-28
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
MT-GD2
Product Selection Red Body Switches
Cat. No. Contact Conduit Connector Connect to ArmorBlock Guard I/O 5-Pin Micro (M12)1
Type
Safety
Auxiliary
Action
Actuator Type
M20
440K-MT55002
1/2 in NPT
12-Pin M23
8-Pin Micro (M12) 440K-M21BNDH 440K-M21ANDH
440K-MT55085 440K-MT55094
440K-MT55022 440K-MT55029 440K-MT55088 440K-MT55095 440K-MT55096
3 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
GD2 440K-MT55074 Standard Fully Flexible 440K-MT55075 440K-MT55004

440K-MT55005 440K-MT55076
BBM MT-GD2 MBB 2 N.C. 2 N.O. GD2 Standard Fully Flexible
440K-MT55086 440K-MT55097
440K-MT55026 440K-MT55087
440K-MT55098 440K-MT55099
440K-MT55077 440K-MT55006
440K-M22ANDT 440K-M22ANDL
440K-M2NNNDS
Snap Acting
Extende 440K-M22AEDM 440K-M22AEDT d Flat GD2 440K-M22ASDM 440K-M22ASDT Standard Fully 440K-M22ABDM 440K-M22ABDT Flexible
440K-MT55039 440K-MT55078
440K-MT55062 440K-MT55042 440K-MT55041 440K-MT55070 440K-MT55045 440K-MT55103 440K-MT55091 440K-MT55106
3 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
GD2 Standard Fully Flexible
MT-GD2 Latch Release
MBB
440K-MT55082 440K-MT55063
440K-MT55065 440K-MT55066 440K-M21BNDH-N5 440K-M2NNNDS-N5

440K-MT55050
2 N.C.
2 N.O.
BBM
GD2 440K-MT55080 Standard Fully Flexible 440K-MT55081 440K-MT55083
440K-MT55104
440K-MT55051 440K-MT55052
MBB
440K-MT55092 440K-MT55105 440K-M21MNDH-N5
Yellow Body Switches

Cat. No. Contact Type MT-GD2 Safety 2 N.C. 2 N.C. Auxiliary 2 N.O. 2 N.O. Action Snap Acting MBB Actuator Type Extended Flat Conduit 1/2 in NPT
440K-M22ANYT 440K-M22AEYT
Connector 12-Pin M23 440K-M22AEYL 5-Pin Micro (M12)1 440K-M2NAEYS 440K-M2NNNYS-N5
For connector ratings see page 3-9. 1 With a 5-pin micro (M12) connector, not all contacts are connected. See Typical Wiring Diagram on page 3-32 for wiring details. With an 8-pin micro (M12) connector, not all contacts are connected. See Typical Wiring Diagram on page 3-32 for wiring details.

R
3-29
Power
Logic
440K-M22MNYT-N5
Operator Interface
For connector ratings see page 3-9. 1 With a 5-pin micro (M12) connector, not all contacts are connected. See Typical Wiring Diagram on page 3-32 for wiring details. With an 8-pin micro (M12) connector, not all contacts are connected. See Typical Wiring Diagram on page 3-32 for wiring details.
440K-MT55079
2-Opto-electronics
440K-MT55089 440K-MT55101
1-
MBB
440K-MT55100
General
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
MT-GD2
Description Safety Outputs 3 N.O. 3 N.O. 2 N.O. 2 N.O. Solid State Auxiliary Outputs 1 N.C. 1 N.C. None 1 N.O. Solid State Terminals Removable (Screw) Removable (Screw) Fixed Removable Reset Type Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Auto./Manual Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Monitored Manual Power Supply 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 24V DC Cat. Page No. 5-24 5-24 5-22 5-16 Cat. No. 440R-N23135 440R-N23132 440R-N23117 440R-N23198 Single-Function Safety Relays MSR127RP MSR127TP MSR126T MSR30RT
Connection Systems
Description Cordset Patchcord Distribution Box Shorting Plug T-Port 4-Pin Micro (M12) 889D-F4AC-1 889D-F4ACDM898D-P4LT-DM4 898D-41LU-DM 898D-43LY-D4 5-Pin Micro (M12) 889D-F5ACDM-1 8-Pin Micro (M12) 889D-F8AB-1 889D-F8ABDM 12-Pin M23 889M-FX9AE-1
3-30
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
MT-GD2
Accessories
3-50
440G-A27011
GD2 flat actuator
3-51
440K-A11112
Fully flex actuator
3-50
440G-A27143
3-55
440G-A27163
Dust Cover
440K-A17180
MT-GD2 Latch Release

119 (4.68)
MT-GD2
8.75 (0.34) 11.5 (0.45) 4 x M5 60 (2.36) 5 (0.2) 40 (1.57) 30 (1.18)
118.5 (4.66) 22 (0.86)
10.5 (0.41) 40 (1.57) 30 (1.18) 38 (1.5) 20.5 (0.81)
60 (2.36) 102.4 (4.03)
24.6 (0.97)
10.5 (0.41)
116.5 (4.59)
30.8 (1.21) 51 (2.0) 67.6 (2.66) 74.6 (2.93)
9.2 (0.36) 5 (0.2)
40.7 (1.6)
43 (1.69)
43 (1.69)
30.8 (1.21)
1 x M20, 1 x 1/2" NPT
20.5 (0.81) 8.75 (0.34)
1 x M20, 1 x 1/2" NPT
20.5 (0.81) 8.75 (0.34)
30.8 (1.21)
9.2 (0.36) 5 (0.2)

R
3-31
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
Extended flat actuator
3-51
440K-A17116
1-
General
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
MT-GD2
Description 2 N.C. & 1 N.O.
33 34 21 11 22 12
2 N.C. & 2 N.O.

43 33 21 11
3 N.C. & 1 N.O.
43 31 21 11 44 34 22 12 44 32 22 12
Safety A (NC) Safety B (NC) Aux A (NO) Aux B (NO) Aux A (NO)
Safety A Safety B Aux A 5.6
20
Safety B (NC)
Safety A (NC)
15 10 5.2 0 mm
Safety A Safety B Safety C Aux A

20 Safety A Safety B Safety C Aux A 6.0 6.0 0 mm
20 Safety A Safety B Aux A Aux B
15
10
5.4
0 mm
15
10
5.4
Contact Action
BBM
20
Safety A Safety B Aux A Aux B
BBM
15 10 6
0 mm Safety A Safety B Safety C Aux A 20
BBM
15 10 5.6 0 mm
5.3
5.2
Open
Closed
7 Safety A Safety B Aux A Aux B
MBB
5.5 0 mm
MBB
6.5
Snap Acting 5-Safety B 2-Safety A 1-Safety A 3-NA 3-Ground 8-Safety A 4-Safety B 2-N/A 1-Aux A 7-Aux A 6-Safety B Safety A Safety B Aux A Aux B Safety A Safety B Safety C Aux A
5-Pin Micro (M12) for Connection to ArmorBlock Guard I/O
8-Pin Micro (M12)
12-Pin Cordset
8 7 6 5 11 4 3 9 12 10 2 1
1 and 3 4 and 6 7 and 8 9 and 10
Safety A Safety B NC Aux A
Pins 2, 5 and 11 are not connected.
12 Grey Red
Ground Safety A Safety B Not Used Aux A Ground
Ground Safety A Safety B Aux A Ground Not Used Safety A Safety B Aux A Aux B Ground
Ground Safety A Safety B Safety C Aux A Ground
Yellow Pink White Blue Green Brown Brown Blue White Green
12-Pin Cordset 889M-FX9AE-1
Yellow Grey Pink Red Green/Yellow
3-32
Safety Switches

Overview
Overview
Guard locking switches are used to protect hazardous areas where a danger is not immediately removed after a stop request. On many machines removal of power of the motor or actuator will not necessarily cause a reliable and immediate stopping of the dangerous motion. Typical applications are: high inertia rotating machines, fast rotating machines, and machines where high pressure needs to be released from pneumatic valves. Gates protected with guard locking switches are usually opened on exception basis. For example: to clear a jam or to regularly maintain the machine. This type of switch should not be used for frequent access during normal operation of the machine. Guard locking switches use a solenoid to activate a lock which blocks or releases the tongue from the switch. Rockwell Automation offers two different types of guard locking switches: Power to Lock When power is applied to the solenoid, the tongue is locked in the switch. When power is removed, the lock is released allowing the tongue to be extracted from the switch. Power to Release When power is applied to the solenoid the lock is released allowing the tongue to be extracted from the switch. When power is removed, the tongue is locked in the switch. Why Use Power to Lock or Power to Release?
Power to Lock Power to Release
Guard Locking Gate Switch
Typical Sequence of Actions

1. The operator requests to enter the hazardous area 2. A controlled or immediate stop of the machine is initiated 3. The machine is stopped: time delay expired or stop motion detected 4. The gate is unlocked by either energizing (Power to Release) or de-energizing (Power to Lock) the solenoid 5. The operator opens the gate and works in the hazardous area 6. The operator exits the hazardous area and closes the gate 7. The operator restarts the machine 8. The gate is locked by either de-energizing (Power to Release) or energizing (Power to Lock) the solenoid 9. The machine returns to its normal speed
Flexible Release
E-Stop Restart
E-Stop Restart Restart
Advantage
Disadvantage
Sudden lose of power will unlock the door allowing personnel to go in the hazardous area and the machine may not be stopped.
Loss of power will not unlock the door and maintenance personnel will not be able to go inside the cell.
Rear Escape
Time based The risk assessment process and stop time measurement will determine the maximum time for the machine to stop from its normal speed of operation. This time defines the delay between the request to open the gate and the authorization to access the zone by unlocking the gate by energizing (Power to Release) or deenergizing (Power to Lock) the solenoid. This time delay can be implemented by using any of our time delay units such as the MSR178 or MSR138 safety relay or by software in one of our Safety PLC. Stop motion Another methodology is to measure when the motion is stopped. When the no-motion is detected, the lock is released to allow personnel to enter the hazardous zone. The CU2, CU3, or MSR57 safety relay will be used to detect the motion is stopped. Safe speed conditions In some applications, the user may need access while the machine is running at a safe speed. The MSR57P used with encoder technology can handle this application. It will verify the speed of the motion and allow access only if the speed does not exceed a preconfigured limit or otherwise the machine will enter a stop condition.
A 40 mm push button is mounted on the back of the TLS and is accessible from the inside of the cell. Pushing the rear escape push button releases the lock mechanism inside the TLS guard locking switch allowing the door to be opened, the machine to stop and the person to escape the hazardous area. Option 2: Flexible Release (Latched) The flexible release push button accessory is designed to be installed inside the hazardous area to provide a means of escape for personnel who become trapped there. It provides remote access to the manual release mechanism within the TLS-GD2 switch in the event of an emergency situation. The flexible release can be retrofitted to existing TLS1-GD2 and TLS3-GD2 switches or installed along with a new switch. The unit is installed at an accessible height next to the guard door, inside the guarded area, while the TLS-GD2 can be mounted outside the guarded area. The flexible release is available with either a 1 m (3.28 ft) or a 3 m (9.84 ft) cable. Pushing the black button on the flexible release, the movement of the cable activates the release mechanism within the switch, allowing the door to be opened, the machine to stop and the person to escape the hazardous area. The flexible release is then reset using the blue reset handle.

R
3-33
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
Different methodologies can help decrease the risk that the danger is removed before the operator has access to the hazardous area:
In the situation where a person is still in the hazardous area, the door is locked and the machine restarts, the TLS guard locking switch product family provides two options for the person to escape the hazard (in addition of an Emergency Stop located outside of the hazardous area): Option 1: Rear Escape (Not Latched)
Power is not applied to When the power is the switch all the time, removed from the cell only when the door after a controlled stop, needs to be opened. the doors unlock Sudden lose of power allowing maintenance does not compromise personnel to go in easily. safety of personnel, as the doors stay closed.
2-Opto-electronics
1-
Manual Override
General
Safety Switches

Overview
Selection Guide
440G-MT TLS1-GD2 TLS2-GD2 TLS3-GD2 Atlas 5
General
Product Holding Force Housing Material Locking Mechanism Escape Release Safety Contacts Aux Contacts Solenoid Monitoring 2 N.C. 2 N.O. Direct Drive 1600 N (360 lb) Metal Power to Release None 3 N.C. 1 N.O. 1 N.O. & 1 N.C. Power to Release Rear Escape and Flexible Release 2000 N (450 lb) Plastic Power to Lock None 2 N.C. 1 N.O. 2 N.C. Power to Release Rear Escape and Flexible Release 5000 N (1124 lb) Metal Power to Release None 2 N.C. 1 N.O. 2 N.C.
12-Opto-electronics
Typical Sequence of Actions and Contact Status

Step Step 1Hazardous Area Protected Solenoid Power Solenoid Feedback A/B Safety A/B Aux A (/B1) Step 2Access to Hazardous Area Authorized Solenoid Power Solenoid Feedback A/B Safety A/B Aux A (/B Step 3Access Authorized AND Door Open ) 440G-MT De-energized Not Available Closed Open Energized Not Available Open 1 Closed Energized Not Available Open Closed De-energized Not Available Open Closed De-energized Not Available Closed Open TLS1 De-energized Closed/Open Closed Open Energized Open/Closed Closed Open Energized Open/Closed Open Closed De-energized Closed/Open Open Closed De-energized Closed/Open Closed Open TLS2 Energized Open/Closed Closed Open De-energized Closed/Open Closed Open De-energized Closed/Open Open Closed Energized Open/Closed Open Closed Energized Open/Closed Closed Open TLS3 De-energized Closed/Closed Closed Open Energized Open/Open Closed Open Energized Open/Open Open Closed De-energized Closed/Closed Open Closed De-energized Closed/Closed Closed Open Atlas 5 De-energized Closed/Closed Closed Open/Open Energized Open/Open Closed Open/Closed Energized Open/Open Open Open/Closed De-energized Closed/Closed Open Closed/Open De-energized Closed/Closed Closed Open/Open
Solenoid Power Solenoid Feedback A/B Safety A/B Aux A (/B1)
Step 4Gate Ready to Be Locked
Step 5Door Locked and Hazardous Area Protected
1 Direct drive of the contacts from the solenoid forces the safety contact to open even if the door is closed.
Aux B solenoid auxiliary contact is available only on the Atlas 5 safety switch.
3-34
Safety Switches

Overview
Application Example
E-Stop Restart
E-Stop Open Restart
Guard Locking Switch
Operating Conditions
The door is closed and locked with a 440G-MT safety switch. The robot is running. The GuardShield light curtain is muted when the robot is away from the assembly table.
Remarks
The safety mats are in place to avoid the machine restarting when the door is closed and the maintenance person is still in the hazardous area. Without the safety mats a Flexible Release can be mounted inside the hazardous area to unlock the door if this situation was to happen. The push of any E-Stop push buttons will stop the robot and the conveyor immediately (Immediate stop).
Maintenance Conditions
In order to clear the jam safely, the operator requests to unlock the door by activating the Open push button. The control system (MSR safety relay or SmartGuard 600) shuts down the robot and conveyor when the process conditions allow the robot and conveyor to be stopped without damaging the machine or the products (Controlled stop). When the robot and conveyor are stopped the control system allows the door to unlock by applying power to the solenoid in the 440G-MT safety switch. The maintenance person opens the door and clears the jam. When the task is done, the maintenance person exits the area, closes the door and activates the Restart push button. The control system restarts the robot and conveyor.

R
3-35
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
1-
General
Safety Switches

440G-MT
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 May be suitable for use in Cat 3 or Cat 4 systems depending on the architecture and application characteristics B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. load PFHD: < 3 x10-7 MTTFd: > 385 years May be suitable for use in performance levels Ple or Pld systems (according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according to IEC 62061) depending on the architecture and application characteristics CE Marked for all applicable directives, cULus, TV, and CCC 3 N.C. or 2 N.C. direct opening action 1 N.O. or 2 N.O. 10 A (Ui) 500V
The 440G-MT solenoid switch is a positive mode, tongue operated guard locking interlock switch that locks a machine guard closed until power is isolated while the guard is open. The guard may only be opened when a signal is applied to the internal solenoid which releases the lock mechanism. The 440G-MT locking mechanism is designed to withstand forces up to 1600 N (360 lb) and the die-cast alloy housing is ideal for use in harsh environments. The 440G-MT solenoid switch is designed for machines that do not stop immediately or where premature interruption of the machine could cause damage to tooling and components or cause an additional hazard. A 24V DC enhanced version is available with diagnostic output, which may be used by a control system to indicate whether a guard door is open or shut independently of the lock mechanism status. A built in LED further visually indicates the status of the switch as door open, door shut and unlocked, and door shut and locked. This enhanced version is supplied with a metal manual override key to more easily enable manual unlocking in conditions when power is not available to electrically unlock the switch.
Functional Safety Data (related to Safety Contacts) 1 Note: For up-to-date information, visit http://www.ab.com/Safety/
Certifications Outputs Safety Contacts Auxiliary Contacts Thermal CurrentIlth Rated Insulation Voltage Utilization Category A600/AC-15 DC-13 Solenoid Characteristics Locking Type Holding Force, Max. Power Supply Solenoid Power Operating Characteristics Break Contact Force, Min.
2-Opto-electronics
Switching Current @ Voltage, Min. 5 mA @ 5V DC (Ue) 600V (le) 1.2 A (Ue) 24V (le) 2 A Power to Release 1600 N (360 lb) 24V AC/DC or 110V AC or 230V AC 13 W typical 100% ED 6 N (1.35 lbf) 160 mm (6.29 in.)/s 2 cycles/s 60 mm (2.36 in.) 1,000,000 operations IP67 -25+60 (13+140) Painted zinc alloy Stainless Steel 1400 (3.08) Red 500V 1.4 A 240V 3A 120V 6A
Features
Mechanical lock High locking force1600 N (360 lb) Heavy-duty die-cast alloy housing, ideal for harsh environments Diagnostic version available
Actuation Speed, Max. Actuation Frequency, Max. Operating Radius, Min Operating Life @ 100 mA load Environmental Enclosure Type Rating Operating Temperature [C (F)] Physical Characteristics Housing Material Actuator Material Weight [g (lb)] Color
1 Usable for ISO 13849-1:2006 and IEC 62061. Data is based on the B10d
value given and: - Usage rate of 1op/10 mins., 24 hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing 51840 operations per year - Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years The safety contacts are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be started.
3-36
Safety Switches

440G-MT
Product Selection
Contact Solenoid Voltage M20 Conduit Safety 3 N.C. 24V AC/DC 2 N.C. 2 N.O. BBM Auxiliary 1 N.O. Action BBM Actuator Type GD2 standard Fully-flexible GD2 standard Fully-flexible GD2 standard 24V DC with diagnostic function and metal override key 3 N.C. 1 N.O. BBM Fully flexible No actuator GD2 standard 2 N.C. 2 N.O. BBM Fully flexible No actuator GD2 standard 3 N.C. 110V AC/DC 2 N.C. 3 N.C. 2 N.C. 2 N.O. 1 N.O. 2 N.O. BBM 1 N.O. BBM Fully-flexible GD2 standard Fully-flexible 230V AC/DC BBM M20 1/2 inch NPT Cat. No. 12-Pin M23 8-Pin Micro (M12)
440G-MT47037 440G-MT47039 440G-MT47041 440G-M3NBGDH-AC
440G-MT47038 440G-MT47040 440G-MT47042 440G-M3NBBDH-AC 440G-MT47007 440G-MT47008 440G-MT47043 440G-MT47044 440G-MT47046 440G-MT47048 440G-MT47045 440G-MT47047 440G-MT47049 440G-MT47010 440G-MT47011 440G-MT47050 440G-MT47149 440G-MT47150 440G-MT47151 440G-MT47152 440G-MT47153 440G-MT47154 440G-MT47155 440G-MT47156 440G-MT47157 440G-MT47158 440G-MT47159 440G-MT47160 440G-MT47161 440G-MT47162 440G-MT47163 440G-MT47164 440G-MT47165 440G-MT47166 440G-MT47070 440G-MT47073 440G-MT47071 440G-MT47074 440G-MT47013 440G-MT47009 440G-MT47077 440G-MT47079 440G-MT47078 440G-MT47080 440G-MT47012 440G-MT47014 440G-MT47016 440G-MT47017 440G-MT47015 440G-MT47024
For connector ratings see page 3-9. With an 8-pin micro (M12) connector, not all contacts are connected. See page 3-39 for wiring details.

Description Safety Outputs Auxiliary Outputs Time Delay Terminals Removable (Screw) Removable (Screw) Fixed Removable Reset Type Power Supply Cat. Page No. Cat. No.
Single-Function Safety Relays MSR127RP MSR127TP MSR126T MSR30RT 3 N.O. 3 N.O. 2 N.O. 2 N.O. Solid State 1 N.C. 1 N.C. None 1 N.O. Solid State Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Auto./Manual Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 24V DC 5-26 5-26 5-24 5-16
440R-N23135 440R-N23132 440R-N23117
440R-N23198
Specialty Safety Relays MSR178 CU2 CU3 3 N.O. 2 N.O. 2 N.O. 2 N.C. 1 N.C. 1 N.C. 1 N.C. and 2 PNP Solid State 3 PNP Solid State 2 PNP Solid State 0.5 s30 min 0.1 s40 min Removable Fixed Fixed Automatic Automatic/Manual 24V AC/DC, 115V AC or 230V AC 24V AC/DC 110V AC 5-40 5-56 5-64 440R-M23227 440R-S07281 440R-S35002
Modular Safety Relays MSR210P Base 2 N.C. only MSR220P Input Module MSR310P Base MSR320P Input Module 2 N.O. MSR300 Series Output Modules Removable Removable Removable Removable Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Monitored Manual 24V DC from the base unit 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC from the base unit 5-82 5-86 5-102 5-106 440R-H23176
440R-W23219 440R-W23218
Note: For additional Safety Relays connectivity, see page 5-12. For additional Safety I/O and Safety PLC connectivity, see page 5-116. For application and wiring diagrams, see page 10-1.

R
3-37
Power
Logic
440R-H23178
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
1-
General
Connector
Safety Switches

440G-MT
Connection Systems
Description Cordset Patchcord
8-Pin Micro 889D-F8AB-1 889D-F8ABDM-
12-Pin M23 889M-F12AH-1 889M-F12AHMU-
40 (1.57) 30 (1.18)
46 (1.81)
38 (1.49)
199 (7.83) 15.5 (0.61)
23 (0.90)
3-38
8.75 (.034)
20.5 (0.80)
Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths. Replace symbol with 0M3, (0.3 m), 0M6 (0.6 m), 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m) or 3 (3 m) for standard lengths. Note: For additional information, see page 7-1.
Accessories
Description GD2 standard actuator Dimensions Cat. No.
440G-A27011
GD2 flat actuator
440K-A11112
Fully flex actuator
3-50
440G-A27143
440G-A27163
Extended flat actuator Replacement Cover, No LED, No Override Key Replacement Cover, LED, Override Key Emergency Override Key (See Warning below.) Dust Cover
440K-A17116
440G-MT47120 440G-MT47123 440G-A36026 440K-A17180

4 x M5
WARNING: Do not attach the Emergency Override Key to the 440G-MT switch.
145 (5.71) 5 (0.19)
9.2 (0.36) 40.7 (1.60) 46.75 (1.84)
Safety Switches

440G-MT
2 N.C. & 2 N.O. 3 N.C. & 1 N.O.
Solenoid
A2 11 21 33 43 A1 12 22 34 44
Solenoid Power Safety A (NC) Safety B (NC) Aux A (NO) Aux B (NO)
A2 11 21 31 43 A1 12 22 32 44
Power Safety A (NC) Safety B (NC) Safety C (NC) Aux A (NO)
12
0 mm
Contact Action
Safety A Safety B Aux A Aux B 3.5
12 Safety A Safety B Safety C Aux A
0 mm
3.5
8-Pin Micro (M12)
3-Aux A 8-Safety A 4-Safety B 5-Safety A
2-Power 1-Aux A 7-power 6-Safety B

Safety A Safety B Safety C
12-Pin M23 QD
8 7 6 5 11 4 3 9 12 10 2 1
1 and 3 4 and 6 7 and 8 2 and 5 9 and 10 12 Brown Blue
Solenoid Power Safety A Safety B Aux A Aux B Ground Solenoid Power Safety A Safety B Aux A Aux B Ground
Solenoid Power
Pin 11 not connected.
Ground Solenoid Power Safety A Safety B Aux A Solenoid Power Safety A Safety B Safety C Aux A Ground
Grey Red Yellow Pink White Green Brown Grey Pink Yellow
12-Pin Cordset 889M-F12AH-1
White Red/Blue Blue Red Black Violet
Grey/Pink not connected.
Green
Diagnostic Version
LED Output Matrix Actuator In Out Solenoid Off Green Flashing Red Solenoid On Amber Red
Diagnostic Electrical Output

Actuator In Out Voltage 0V DC +24V DC
Electrical output independent of solenoid status. Maximum output is 100 mA.

R
3-39
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
Aux A
2-Opto-electronics
Open
Closed
BBM
BBM
1-
General
Safety Switches

TLS-GD2
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 device per EN 954-1 dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. load PFHD: < 3 x10-7 MTTFd: > 385 years May be suitable for use in performance levels Ple or Pld systems (according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according to IEC 62061) depending on the architecture and application characteristics CE Marked for all applicable directives, cULus, TV, and CCC (TLS-1 & -2) 3 N.C. direct opening action (TLS-3) 4 N.C. direct opening action (TLS-1 & -2) 2 N.O. (1 solenoid monitoring) (TLS-3 1 N.O.) 10 A (Ui) 500V
The TLS-GD2 is a positive mode, tongue operated guard locking interlock switch that locks a machine guard closed until power is isolated and ensures that it remains isolated while the guard is open. It has three safety (N.C.) contacts and two auxiliary (N.O.) contacts. The TLS-GD2 head has two entry slots and it can be rotated to provide four actuator entry points. A blanking plug is provided to seat the unused slot. The guard may only be opened when a signal is applied to the TLSGD2's internal solenoid which releases the lock mechanism. This signal can be via CU1 electronic timer relays or CU2 stopped motion detectors. Therefore the TLS-GD2 is ideal for machines which do not stop immediately or where premature interruption of the machine could cause damage to tooling and components or cause an additional hazard. The TLS-GD2 is available in three types. The TLS-1 GD2 and TLS-3 GD2 incorporate a power-to-release function. Two manual release points with security screws allow the locked TLS-GD2 to be released in emergencies. An optional lid-mounted key-release style can also be supplied. The TLS-2 GD2 has a power-to-lock function. Each type of switch has five sets of contacts of various forms and are suitable for use with PLCs. The TLS-1 GD2 and TLS-3 GD2 are both available with escape release options. They are intended for machine guarding with full body access. The switch is installed so that the escape release push button on the rear side is accessible from inside the hazardous area. This allows the intentional unlocking of the TLS-GD2 from inside a hazardous area, providing a means of escape for a person who may become trapped. A stainless-steel actuator guide is fitted to protect the unit from actuator damage due to poor guard alignment or guard wear. TLS-GD2 has an ingress protection rating of IP69K making it suitable for harsh washdown applications as found in the food and beverage, pharmaceutical, solar and semiconductor industries. IMPORTANT: With the TLS-2 GD2 power to lock style, provisions may be required to ensure that a dangerous situation can not result from open circuit faults or power cuts.
Certifications Outputs Safety Contacts Auxiliary Contacts Thermal CurrentIlth Rated Insulation Voltage Utilization Category A600/AC-15 DC-13 Solenoid Characteristics Locking Type Holding Force, Max. Releasable Load, Max. Power Supply Solenoid Power Escape Release Button Operating Characteristics Break Contact Force, Min. Actuation Speed, Max. Actuation Frequency, Max. Operating Radius, Min Operating Life @ 100 mA load Environmental Enclosure Type Rating Operating Temperature [C (F)] Physical Characteristics Housing Material Actuator Material
2-Opto-electronics
Switching Current @ Voltage, Min. 5 mA @ 5V DC (Ue) 600V (le) 1.2 A (Ue) 24V (le) 2 A TLS-1 & -3 Power-to-Release TLS-2 Power-to-Lock 2000 N (450 lbf) 100 N (22.5 lbf) 24V AC/DC or 110V AC or 230V AC (solenoid) Typically 7 W 100% ED Force max.: 50 N (11.25 lbs) 20 N (4.5 lbf) 160 mm (6.29 in.)/s 1 cycle/s 160 mm (6.3 in.) [80 mm (3.15 in.) with flexible actuator] 1,000,000 operations IP66, IP67 and IP69K -20+60 (-4+140) UL Approved glass-filled PBT Stainless Steel 400 (0.88) Red 500V 1.4 A 240V 3.0 A 120V 6.0 A
Features
Power to release or power to lock High locking force 2000 N (450 lb) Five contacts: 2 N.C. & 1 N.O. for door position monitoring 1 N.C. & 1 N.O. or 2 N.C. for lock monitoring Rotatable head: 4 possible key entry slots Conforms to EN 1088 & EN 60947-5-1 Escape Release version available IP69K, suitable for high pressure, high temperature washdown
Weight [g (lb)] Color
value given and: - Usage rate of 1op/10mins., 24hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing 51840 operations per year - Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years The safety contacts are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be started.
3-40
Safety Switches

TLS-GD2
Product Selection
Contacts Solenoid Conduit Type Safety Auxiliary Contacts Voltage Actuator Type 24V AC/DC TLS-1 GD2 Power to Release GD2 Standard Fully Flex 2 N.C. 1 N.O. 1 N.C. & 1 N.O. 110V AC/DC 230V AC/DC GD2 Standard Fully Flex 24V AC/DC TLS-2 GD2 Power to Lock GD2 Standard Fully Flex 2 N.C. 1 N.O. 1 N.C. & 1 N.O. 110V AC/DC 230V AC/DC GD2 Standard Fully Flex 24V AC/DC TLS-3 GD2 Power to Release GD2 Standard Fully Flex 2 N.C. 1 N.O. 2 N.C. 110V AC/DC 230V AC/DC TLS-1 GD2 Power to Release with Escape Release TLS-3 GD2 Power to Release with Escape Release 24V AC/DC 2 N.C. 1 N.O. 1 N.C. & 1 N.O. 110V AC/DC GD2 Standard Fully Flex GD2 Standard GD2 Standard 24V AC/DC 2 N.C. 1 N.O. 2 N.C. 110V AC/DC GD2 Standard GD2 Standard M20
440G-T27121
Cat. No. 1/2 inch NPT Adaptor 440G-T27169

440G-T27171
12-Pin M23 440G-T27233 440G-T27234 440G-T27235 440G-T27239 440G-T27240 440G-T27241 440G-T27245 440G-T27246 440G-T27247
8-Pin Micro (M12) 440G-T2NBBPH-1R 440G-T2NBBPH-1L 440G-T2NBBPH-2R
440G-T27251 440G-T27252 440G-T27124 440G-T27253 440G-T27254 440G-T27123

440G-T27127
440G-T27172 440G-T27174 440G-T27175

440G-T27177
440G-T27255 440G-T27256 440G-T27132 440G-T27257 440G-T27258 440G-T27129

440G-T27134
440G-T27178 440G-T27180 440G-T27181 440G-T27183 440G-T27184 440G-T27186
440G-T27259 440G-T27260 440G-T27138 440G-T27261 440G-T27262 440G-T27136
440G-T21BNPM-1B 440G-T21BNPT-1B 440G-T21BNPL-1B 440G-T2NBNPH-1B 440G-T21BGPM-1B 440G-T21BGPT-1B 440G-T21BGPL-1B 440G-T21BNPM-4B 440G-T21BNPT-4B 440G-T21BGPM-4B 440G-T21BGPT-4B
440G-T21BNPM-2B 440G-T21BNPT-2B 440G-T21BNPL-2B 440G-T2NBNPH-2B 440G-T21BGPM-2B 440G-T21BGPT-2B 440G-T21BGPL-2B 440G-T21BNPM-5B 440G-T21BNPT-5B 440G-T21BGPM-5B 440G-T21BGPT-5B
For connector ratings, see page 3-9. With an 8-pin micro connector, not all contacts are connected. See page 3-45 for wiring details.
WARNING:
The 12-wire cordset 889M-F12AH-1 must be used AND For the TLS1 and TLS2: the jumper between 12 and 41 must be removed For the TLS3: the jumpers between 12 and 41 and 22 and 51 must be removed Monitoring of safety contact(s) and the solenoid feedback (in series) is available, when jumpers are in place: AND
WARNING:

R
3-41
Power
For the TLS1 and TLS2: by using pins 4 and 6 on the 12-pin, M23 receptacle or Pink and Yellow wires on the 12-wire cordset (889M-F12AH-1) For the TLS3: by using pins 4 and 6 and pins 7 and 8 on the 12-pin, M23 receptacle or Pink and Yellow and White and Red/Blue wires on the 12-wire cordset (889M-F12AH-1)
Logic
To monitor independently the safety contact(s) and the solenoid feedback (TLS 1, 2 and 3):
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
1-
General
Connector
Safety Switches

TLS-GD2
440R-N23135 440R-N23132 440R-N23117
440R-N23198
Specialty Safety Relays MSR178 CU2 CU3 3 N.O. 2 N.O. 2 N.O. 2 N.C. 1 N.C. 1 N.C. 1 N.C. and 2 PNP Solid State 3 PNP Solid State 2 PNP Solid State 0.5 s30 min 0.1 s40 min Removable Fixed Fixed Automatic Automatic/Manual 24V AC/DC, 115V AC or 230V AC 24V AC/DC 110V AC 5-40 5-56 5-64 440R-M23227 440R-S07281 440R-S35002
Modular Safety Relays MSR210P Base 2 N.C. only MSR220P Input Module MSR310P Base MSR320P Input Module 2 N.O. MSR300 Series Output Modules Removable Removable Removable Removable Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Monitored Manual 24V DC from the base unit 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC from the base unit 5-82 5-86 5-102 5-106 440R-H23176 440R-H23178 440R-W23219 440R-W23218
Connection Systems
Description Cordset Patchcord 8-Pin Micro (M12) 889D-F8AB-1 889D-F8ABDM12-Wire, 12-Pin M23 889M-F12AH-1 889M-F12AHMU- 9-Wire, 12-Pin M23 889M-FX9AE-1
Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths. Replace symbol with 0M3, (0.3 m), 0M6 (0.6 m), 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m) or 3 (3 m) for standard lengths. The 9-wire cordset can be used only with the TLS3 versions. Note: For additional information, see page 7-1.
3-42
Safety Switches

TLS-GD2
Accessories
3-50
440G-A27011
GD2 flat actuator
3-51
440K-A11112
3-51
440K-A17116
Fully flex actuator
3-50
440G-A27143
Cover for TLS-1 with external override key for series D and earlier Cover for TLS-3 with external override key for series D and earlier Cover for TLS-1 with override key attached for series D and earlier Cover for TLS-3 with override key attached for series D and earlier Cover for TLS-1 with external override key for series E and later Cover for TLS-3 with external override key for series E and later Cover for TLS-1 with override key attached for series E and later Cover for TLS-3 with override key attached for series E and later Emergency Override Key (See Warning below.) Flexible Release1 m (3.28 ft) Cable 3-54
440G-A27140 440G-A27142 440G-A27207 440G-A27208 440G-A27371 440G-A27372 440G-A27373 440G-A27374
440G-A36026
440G-A27356
Flexible Release3 m (9.84 ft) Cable
440G-A27357
Dust Cover
440K-A17183
Sliding Bolt
3-55
440K-AMDS
Mounting Plate
3-55
440K-AMDSSMPB
WARNING: Do not attach the Emergency Override Key to the TLS-GD2 switch.

R
3-43
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
Sliding bolt actuator not to be used with the Escape Release
3-55
440G-A27163
1-
General
Safety Switches

TLS-GD2
43 (1.69) 6 (0.24) 5 (0.2) 20.5 (0.81) 9 (0.35) 25.5 (1) 33 (1.3) 14 (0.55) 126 (4.96) 105 (4.13) 14 (0.55)
21 (0.83)
17 (0.67)
5.5 (0.22) 5 (0.2)
3 (0.12)
6.5 (0.26) M5
5 (0.2)
6.5 (0.26) 17 (0.67) 21 (0.83)
86 (3.39) 57 (2.24)
73 (2.87)
2 x M5
31.5 (1.24) 52.5 (2.07) 60.5 (2.38) 67.5 (2.66)
3 (0.12)
TLS-GD2 Escape Release

3.0 (0.11) 5 (0.19) 6.5 (0.25) 4 (0.15) Isometric View 17.0 (0.66) 85.0 (3.34) 73.0 (2.87) 24.0 (0.94) Dia.
21.0 (0.82)
14.5 (0.57) 3.0 (0.11) 31.4 (1.23) 52.0 (2.04) 60.0 (2.36) 67.0 (2.63)
6.5 (0.26)
43.0 (1.69) 21.0 (0.82) This detail in key release only 17.25 (0.67) 6.0 (0.23) 20.5 (0.80) 33.0 (1.29) 14.0 (0.55) 37.0 41.0 27.0 (1.45) (1.61) (1.06)
23.5 (0.92)
125.0 (4.92) 104.0 (4.09) max.
9.0 (0.35) 3.25 (0.12) 65.25 (2.56) Without Handle 75.0 (2.95) 39.0 (1.53) Dia.
14.0 (0.55) 5.0 (0.19)
5.5 (0.21) 9.75 (0.38)
41.15 (1.62)
45.0 (1.77)
40.0 (1.57) Dia.
3-44
22 (0.87) 27 (1.06) 39 (1.54) 14.5 (0.57) 4 (0.16)

25.5 (1.0)
Optional Lock Cover
Safety Switches

TLS-GD2
Red Switches TLS1 TLS2 TLS3
Solenoid
Solenoid
Safety A (NC) Safety B (NC) AUX A (NO)
11 21 33
12 22 34
A2 42 54
A1 41 53
Power Solenoid A (NC) Solenoid B (NO)
Safety A (NC) Safety B (NC) AUX A (NO)
11 21 33
12 22 34
A2 42 51
A1 41 52
Power Solenoid A (NC) Solenoid B (NC)
Jumper between 12 & 41

20 6 4 0 mm 20 Solenoid A Safety A Safety B Aux A Solenoid B 3.0 Lock Point 6 0 mm
Jumper between 12 & 41 and 22 & 51

20 6 4 0 mm
Open
Closed
BBM
BBM 3-Solenoid A
BBM 2-Power 1-Solenoid A 7-Power 6-Safety B & Solenoid B
8-Pin Micro (M12)
4-Safety B 5-Safety A 7-Power 6-Safety B
4-Safety B & Solenoid B 5-Safety A & Solenoid A
No jumper on 12-41.
Jumper on 12-41 and 22-51. 1 and 3 4 and 12 7 and 5 9 and 10 6 and 11 2 and 8 Solenoid Power Safety A Safety B Aux A Solenoid A Solenoid B Solenoid Power Safety A & Solenoid A Safety B & Solenoid B Solenoid A Brown Blue Solenoid Power Safety A & Solenoid A Safety B & Solenoid B Aux A Solenoid Power Safety A Safety B Aux A Solenoid A Solenoid B
12-Pin M23
8 7 6 5 11 4 3 9 12 10 2 1
1 and 3 4 and 12 7 and 8 9 and 10 6 and 11 2 and 5 Brown Blue
Solenoid Power Safety A Safety B Aux A Solenoid A Solenoid B Solenoid Power Safety A Safety B Solenoid A
Grey Red Yellow Pink White Green
12-Pin, 9-Wire Cordset 889M-FX9AE-1 Pink/Yellow: Not connected
Can not be used.
White Green Yellow Grey Pink Red
Brown Grey Pink Green 12-Pin, 12-Wire Cordset 889M-F12AH-1 White Red/Blue Black Violet Grey/Pink Yellow Blue Red See WARNING notes on page 3-41.
Solenoid Power Safety A Safety B Aux A Solenoid A Solenoid B
Brown Grey Pink Green White Red Black Violet Grey/Pink Yellow Blue Red/Blue

R
3-45
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
3-Solenoid A 8-Safety A
2-Power 1-Solenoid A
8-Safety A & Solenoid A
1-
Contact Action
Solenoid A Safety A Safety B Aux A Solenoid B
Solenoid A Solenoid B Aux A Safety A Safety B
General
Safety Switches

Atlas 5
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. load PFHD: < 3 x10-7 MTTFd: > 385 years May be suitable for use in performance levels Ple or Pld systems (according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according to IEC 62061) depending on the architecture and application characteristics CE Marked for all applicable directives, cULus, CSA, and TV Atlas 5: 2 N.C. direct opening action; 1 N.O. direct opening action Atlas 5 trapped key (left hand): 2 N.C. direct opening action; 1 N.O. direct opening action 1 N.O. 10 A (Ui) 500V
The Atlas 5 is a positive-mode, tongue-operated guard-locking interlock switch that locks a machine guard closed until power is isolated to ensure that it remains isolated while the guard is open. A heavy-duty switch, the Atlas 5 locking mechanism is designed to withstand forces up to 5000 N (1124 lb) and the die-cast alloy housing is ideal for use in harsh environments. A unique feature of the Atlas 5 is a patented self-aligning head that tolerates actuator or guard misalignment, making it particularly useful for heavy machine guards. The Atlas 5 is designed for machines that do not stop immediately or where premature interruption of the machine could cause damage to tooling and components or cause an additional hazard. With 2 safety (N.C.) contacts and 2 auxiliary (N.O.) contact, Atlas 5 is ideal for PLC controlled machines.
Certifications Outputs
2-Opto-electronics
Safety Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts Thermal Current Ilth Rated Insulation Voltage Utilization Category AC-15 DC-13 Solenoid Characteristics Locking Type Holding Force, Max. Power Supply Solenoid Power Operating Characteristics Break Contact Force, Min. Actuation Speed, Max.1 Actuation Frequency, Max. Operating Radius, Min Operating Life @ 100 mA load Environmental Enclosure Type Rating Operating Temperature [C (F)] Physical Characteristics Housing Material
Switching Current @ Voltage, Min. 5 mA @ 5V DC (Ue) 240V (le) 1.5 A (Ue) 24V (le) 2 A Power to Release 5000 N (1124 lbf) 24V AC/DC or 110V AC or 230V AC (solenoid) 13 W typical 100% ED 12 N (2.7 lbf) 160 mm (6.29 in.)/s 2 cycles/s 300 mm end entry, 800 mm entry front 1,000,000 operations IP65 -10+60 (+14+140) Die-cast alloy Stainless Steel 1200 (2.65) Red 120V 3A
Features
Mechanical lock High locking force5000 N (1124 lb) Heavy duty die-cast alloy housing ideal for harsh environments Patented self-aligning head tolerates actuator misalignment
Actuator Material Weight [g (lb)] Color
value given and: - Usage rate of 1op/10mins., 24hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing 51840 operations per year - Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years The safety contacts are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be started.
3-46
Safety Switches

Atlas 5
Product Selection
Contact M20 Conduit Module Type Standard Standard LH Key Lock 2 N.C. 1 N.O. 2 N.C. & 1 N.O. Actuator Type Safety Auxiliary Solenoid Contacts Solenoid Voltage 24V AC/DC M20 1/2 inch NPT Adaptor Cat. No.
12-Pin M23
8-Pin Micro (M12)
440G-L07264 440G-L07258 440G-L07298 440G-L2NNSDH-3N 440G-L07255 440G-L07249 440G-L07301 440G-L2NNSDH-38
110V AC/DC 440G-L07263 440G-L07257 230V AC/DC 440G-L07262 440G-L07256 24V AC/DC 110V AC/DC 440G-L07254 440G-L07248 230V AC/DC 440G-L07253 440G-L07247

440R-N23135 440R-N23132 440R-N23117
440R-N23198
Specialty Safety Relays MSR178 CU2 CU3 3 N.O. 2 N.O. 2 N.O. 2 N.C. 1 N.C. 1 N.C. 1 N.C. and 2 PNP Solid State 3 PNP Solid State 2 PNP Solid State 0.5 s30 min 0.1 s40 min Removable Fixed Fixed Automatic Automatic/Manual 24V AC/DC, 115V AC or 230V AC 24V AC/DC 110V AC 5-40 5-56 5-64 440R-M23227
440R-S35002
Modular Safety Relays MSR210P Base 2 N.C. only MSR220P Input Module MSR310P Base MSR320P Input Module 2 N.O. MSR300 Series Output Modules Removable Removable Removable Removable Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Monitored Manual 24V DC from the base unit 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC from the base unit 5-82 5-86 5-102 5-106 440R-H23176 440R-H23178 440R-W23219 440R-W23218
Connection Systems
Description Cordset Patchcord 8-Pin Micro (M12) 889D-F8AB-1 889D-F8ABDM12-Pin M23 889M-F12AH-1 889M-F12AHMU-
Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths. Replace symbol with 0M3, (0.3 m), 0M6 (0.6 m), 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m) or 3 (3 m) for standard lengths. Note: For additional information, see page 7-1.

R
3-47
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
440R-S07281
2-Opto-electronics
1-
For connector ratings, see 3-9. With an 8-pin micro connector, not all contacts are connected. See page 3-49 for wiring details.
General
Connector
Safety Switches

Atlas 5
Accessories
12 (0.47)
56 (2.2)
3 x 1/2" NPT 30 (1.18)
23 (0.91)
56 (2.2)
5 (0.2)
52 (2) 10 (0.39) 14 (0.55)
4 X M5 5 (0.2)
163 (6.4) 184 (7.24)
17 (0.67) 13 (0.51) 5 (0.2) 25 (0.98) 95 (3.74) 56 (2.2) 12 (0.47)
90 (3.54)
3-48
16 (0.63)
80 (3.15)
General 1Approximate Dimensions
Standard actuator
3-50
440G-A07136
Atlas Replacement End Cap
440G-A07180
Fully flex actuator
3-50
440G-A07269
Dust Cover
440K-A17181
3 x M20
2-Opto-electronics
25 (0.98)
Safety Switches

Atlas 5
Atlas 5
Power Safety A Safety B Aux A Solenoid A
E A2 A1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
10 9 19 20
20
2.5
0mm
Contact Action
7.6
4.9
Open
Closed
3-Solenoid A 8-Safety A
BBM 2-Power 1-Solenoid A 7-Power 6-Safety B Solenoid Power Safety A Aux A Solenoid A Ground Solenoid Power Safety A Safety B Solenoid A Solenoid Power Safety A Safety B Aux A Solenoid A Ground Safety B
8-Pin Micro (M12)
Jumpers on 9-10 and 19-20.
12-Pin M23
8 7 6 5 11 4 3 9 12 10 2 1
1 and 3 4 and 6 7 and 8 2 and 5 9 and 10 12 Brown Blue
Pin 11 not connected.
Yellow Pink White Green Brown Grey Pink Yellow
12-Pin Cordset 889M-F12AH-1
White Red/Blue Blue Red Black Violet Green

R
3-49
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
Grey Red
2-Opto-electronics
Safety A Safety B Solenoid A Aux A
1-
General
Safety Switches
Accessories
Actuators
Accessories for Interlock and Guard Locking Switches Actuators1
56 (2.2)
Standard actuator
4 (0.16)
10.5 (0.41)
24 (0.94)
M5 90 (3.54) 77 (3.03)
Fully flex actuator

21 (0.82) 18 (0.7) 75 (2.95)
10 (0.39)
M5
18 (0.71) 36 (1.42) 4 (0.16)
9 (0.35)
3.5 (0.14)
6.8 (0.27) Adjusting screws 52 (2.05) 40 (1.57) 31 (1.22 2 x M3
14.5 (0.57)
Fully flex actuator
13 (0.51) 19 (0.75) 51(2.01)
29 (1.14)
7.25 (0.29)
52 (2.05)
4 (0.16)
18 (0.71) 1.5 (0.06)
14.5 (0.57)
1 See page 3-8 for Switch Compatibility table.
3-50
11.2 (0.44)
25.5 (1.0)
Item
Description
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]

3.5 (0.14)
Cat. No.
440G-A07136
10 (0.39)
30 (1.18) 50 (1.97) 2 x M5
5 (0.2) 5 (0.2) 18 (0.71)
440G-A07269
440G-A27011
40 (1.57) 52 (2.05) M5 CSK
18 (0.71)
440G-A27143
8 (0.31) 20 (0.79)
4 x 5.5 (0.22)
52 (20.5) 40 (1.57)
440K-A11094
Safety Switches
Accessories
Actuators
Actuators1 (continued)
Item Description Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
3.5 (0.14) 17.5 (0.69) 31.2 (1.23)
Cat. No.
Standard actuator
5 (0.2)
440K-A11095
14.5 (0.57)
40 (1.57) 52 (2.05) 17.5 (0.69) 3.5 (0.14)
M5 CSK
GD2 flat actuator
57 (2.24)
440K-A11112
25 (0.98)
36 (1.42)
35 (1.38) 29 (1.14)
20.7 (0.81)
Replacement Alignment Guide
32.7 (1.29) 52 (2.05)
440K-A11115
20.7 (0.81) 32.7 (1.29)
35 29 20.7 (0.81) 52.0 (2.04)
8.5 (0.33)
32.7 (1.29)
55.5 (2.19) 40 (1.57)
14 (0.55) 15.5 (0.61)
440K-A11144
3.5 (0.14)
17.5 (0.69) 31.2 (1.23)
Standard actuator
5 (0.2)
440K-A11238
14.5 (0.57)
40 (1.57) 52 (2.05)
M5 CSK
17.5 (0.69)
70 (2.75)
10.8 (0.42)
32.2 (1.26)
7 (0.27)
440K-A17116
5.2 (0.2)
15 (0.59) 36 (1.41)
20 (0.78)

R
3-51
Power
Logic
8 (0.31)
3 (0.11)
Operator Interface
14 (0.55)
46.5 (1.83)
2-Opto-electronics
1-
General
Safety Switches
Accessories
Actuators
Actuators1 (continued)
Item Description Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
23 (0.91) 18.25 (0.72) 8.75 (0.34) 24 (0.94) 7.5 (0.3)
Cat. No.
29 (1.14)
8 (0.31)
3 (0.12)
8.5 (0.33)
14 (0.55)
40 (1.57)
40 (1.57) 55.5 (2.19)
19 (0.75) 6 (0.24)
3 (0.12)
Metal Alignment Guide
15.5 (0.61)
13 (0.51)
2 x M3
19 ().75) 51 (2.0)
6.8 (0.27)
40 (1.57) 52 (2.05)
3-52
20 (0.79)
31 (1.22)
8 (0.31)
440K-A21006
M4
1 (0.04) 3 (0.12)
12 (0.47)
12 (0.47)
3 (0.12)
M4
440K-A21014
15 (0.59) 25 (0.98)
12 (0.47)
440K-A21030
13.5 (0.53) 13 (0.51) 25 (0.98)

18 (0.71)
440K-A21069
440K-A27010
4 x 5.5 (0.22)
Safety Switches
Accessories
Beacons, Bulbs and Conduits
Beacons and Bulbs
Item Description Indicator, M20 Conduit Pilot LightAmber Lens T-3 1/4 Insert Use T-3 1/4 Bulb (Sold Separately) Cat. No.
440A-A19001
Indicator, M20 Conduit Pilot LightRed Lens T-3 1/4 Insert Use T-3 1/4 Bulb (Sold Separately)
440A-A19002
Indicator, 1/2 inch NPT Conduit Pilot LightAmber Lens T-3 1/4 Insert Use T-3 1/4 Bulb (Sold Separately)
440A-A19005
Indicator, 1/2 inch NPT Conduit Pilot LightRed Lens T-3 1/4 Insert Use T-3 1/4 Bulb (Sold Separately)
440A-A19007
Bulb, 24V for Conduit Pilot Light 2.8W T-3 1/4 Bulb, Miniature Screw Base Bulb, 110V for Conduit Pilot Light 2.6W T-3 1/4 Bulb, Miniature Screw Base Bulb, 240V for Conduit Pilot Light 0.75W T-3 1/4 Bulb, Miniature Screw Base Red LED Bulb, 24V AC/DC for Conduit Pilot Light Bayonet Style Insert Amber LED Bulb, 24V AC/DC for Conduit Pilot Light Bayonet Style Insert Red LED Bulb, 120V AC for Conduit Pilot Light Bayonet Style Insert Amber LED Bulb, 120V AC for Conduit Pilot Light Bayonet Style Insert
440A-A09056 440A-A09055 440A-A09054 800T-N319R 800T-N319A 800T-N320R 800T-N320A
Conduit Accessories
Item Description Cat. No.
Blanking plug, M20 conduit
440A-A07265
Cable Grip, M16 Conduit, Accommodates Cable Diameter 47 mm (0.270.16 in.)
440A-A09004
Cable grip, M20 conduit, accommodates cable diameter 710.5 mm (0.270.41 in.)
440A-A09028
Adaptor, conduit, M20 to 1/2 inch NPT, plastic
440A-A09042
Adaptor, Conduit, 1/2 inch NPT to M16, Brass
440A-A09093
Adaptor, Conduit, M16 to 1/2 inch NPT, Brass
440A-A09094

R
3-53
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
1-
General
Safety Switches
Accessories
Replacement and Dust Covers, Emergency Override, and Flex Release
Replacement Covers
Item Description Elf Cadet Trojan T15 Trojan 5 Standard Models Only Trojan T5 GD2 Trojan T6 Standard Models Only Trojan T6 GD2 Cat. No. 440A-A33085 440A-A21115 440A-A11499 440A-A11495 440A-A11496 440A-A11497 440A-A11498 440G-MT47120 440G-MT47123 440G-A27140 440G-A27142 440G-A27207 440G-A27208 440G-A07180
Dust Covers
Item
440G-MT No LED, No Override 440G-MT LED and Override Cover for TLS-1 with external override key for series D and earlier Cover for TLS-3 with external override key for series D and earlier Cover for TLS-1 with override key attached for series D and earlier Cover for TLS-3 with override key attached for series D and earlier Atlas Replacement End Cap
Applicable Switch Elf Cadet Trojan T15, T5, and T6 All Models MT G2 440G-MT TLS-GD2 Atlas 5
Cat. No. 440K-A17182
440K-A17180
Emergency Override
Item
440K-A17183 440K-A17181
Description TLS-GD2/440G-MT Solenoid Emergency Override (See Warning below.)
Cat. No. 440G-A36026
Operator Interface
Flex Release
Item
WARNING: Do not attach the Emergency Override Key to the TLS-GD2/440G-MT switch.
Description Flexible Release1 m (3.28 ft) Cable

60 40 (2.36) (1.57)

125 (4.9) 100 (3.93)
Cat. No. 440G-A27356
Logic Power
4 x M5
Flexible Release3 m (9.84 ft) Cable
440G-A27357
95 (3.7) 8 (0.31) 150 (5.9)
65 (2.55)
3-54
Safety Switches
Accessories
Tools and Door Handles
Tools
Item Description Cat. No.
Security Bit
440A-A09015
Screwdriver Including Security Bit
440A-A09018
Door Handles
Item Description Dimensions [mm (in.)]
10 20 (0.39) (0.78) 19 (0.74) 50 100 (3.93) 140 (5.51) 84 (3.3) 40 (1.57) Tapped M5 42 (1.65) 5.5 (0.21) 50 (1.96) 20 18 (0.7)
Cat. No.
24 (0.94)
25.5 (1.0) 34 (1.33)
2.5 (0.09) 117.5 (4.62)

55.4 (2.18)
20.5 (0.8)
65 (2.56)
6.4 (0.25) Dia.
Sliding Bolt
54.4 (2.14)
440K-AMDS
120 (4.72)
73 (2.87)
17 (0.67)
125 (4.92)
38 (1.5) 60.5 (2.38) 19 (0.75) 43 (1.69) 65.95 (2.6) 105.3 (4.15) 18 (0.71)
Sliding Bolt Mounting Plate for TLS-GD2
13 52 (2.05) (0.51) 43 6 (0.24) (1.69)
52 (2.05) 8 (0.32) 34 (1.36) 23 (0.91) 7.35 (0.29)
130 (5.12)
440K-AMDSSMPB
8 (0.32)
3 (0.12)

R
3-55
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
440G-A27163
1-
General
Safety Switches
SensaGuard
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards Safety Classification IEC 60947-5-3, IEC 61508, EN 954 Cat. 4/SIL3 PFHD: > 1.12 x 10-9 MTTFd: > 385 years Dual channel interlock may be suitable for performance levels PLe or PLd (according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according to IEC 62061) depending on application characteristics CE Marked for all applicable directives, cULus (UL 508), and TV 2 x PNP, 0.2 A, max.; Status: ON (+24V DC) 1 x PNP, 0.2 A max.; Status: OFF (0V DC) 18 mm Plastic Barrel/18 mm Target 18 mm Plastic Barrel/30 mm Target 18 mm Stainless Steel Barrel/Standard Target Large Rectangular Flat Pack with Standard Target Misalignment Tolerance, Min Repeat Accuracy Output Current, Max. Operating Voltage Current Consumption Frequency of Operating Cycle Response Time (Off) Environmental Enclosure Type Rating Operating Temperature [C (F)] Relative Humidity Shock Vibration Radio Frequency Physical Characteristics Housing Material Actuator Material Color VALOX DR 48 VALOX DR 48 Red NEMA 3, 4X, 12, 13, IP69K -10+55 (+14+131) 595% IEC 68-2-27, 30 g, 11 ms IEC 68-2-6 1055 Hz IEC 61000-4-3, IEC 61000-4-6 See misalignment curve 10% of Sensing Range 200 mA (all outputs) 24V DC, +10%/-15% Class 2 50 mA 1 Hz 54 ms 15 mm (0.59 in.) 25 mm (0.98 in.) 10 mm (0.39 in.) 15 mm (0.59 in.)
Description
When it comes to machine safety, Rockwell Automation knows that protection of personnel and equipment is your main concern. At the same time, flexibility and productivity are points that must also be considered as you design your safety system. Optimize all of these with the new Allen-Bradley SensaGuard family of non-contact switches. Featuring the latest generation of RFID technology for coding and inductive technology for sensing, SensaGuards large sensing range and tolerance to misalignment is a cost-effective solution that is ideally suited for a wide range of industrial safety applications. The SensaGuard product line is a Category 4/SIL 3 rated switch per EN954-1, TV functional safety approved to IEC 61508.
Certifications
Outputs (Guard Door Closed, Actuator in Place) Safety Outputs Auxiliary Outputs Operating Characteristics
Sensing Distance (Assure)
Features
Switches can be connect to a standard safety relay, for example, the MSR126, MSR127, MSR200/300 Family, SmartGuard and Safety I/O Blocks Multiple actuator sizes for large sensing distance IP69K environmental rating Short-circuit and over-voltage protection LED located on the switch for door status and troubleshooting Unique coded version Automatic learn process at unit power up During commissioning you have the option to select if the sensor can learn a new actuator up to eight times or lock the unit so it can not learn another actuator Integrated latch version Adjustable magnetic latch force 2060N Designed for easy mounting on aluminum profile
Benefits
No dedicated controller required Cat 4/SIL 3 rating maintained even with multiple units connected in series Switches can be connected in series with other devices (light curtain, E-stops, key interlock switches) Extended diagnostics for easy troubleshooting Large sensing distances Tolerance to misalignment Multiple sensing directions Stainless steel version suitable for use in harsh environments Use standard proximity brackets
based on: - Usage rate of 1op/10 mins., 24 hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing 51840 operations per year - Mission time/Proof test interval of 30 years
3-56
Safety Switches
SensaGuard
Product Selection
Cat. No. Assured Sensing Distance 15 mm (0.59 in.) 25 mm (0.98 in.) 10 mm (0.39 in.) LED Door Indication/ Diagnostic Yes Margin Indication Actuator Code Magnetic Hold Type Standard Unique Standard Yes Unique Standard Yes Unique Standard Unique Standard Unique Standard Unique Standard Unique 6 inch Pigtail, 8pin Micro (M12)
440N-Z21S16H
Type 18 mm plastic barrel/18 mm actuator 18 mm plastic barrel/30 mm actuator 18 mm stainless steel barrel/18 mm actuator
3m 440N-Z21S16A 440N-Z21U16A 440N-Z21S26A 440N-Z21U26A 440N-Z21S17A 440N-Z21U17A 440N-Z21SS2A 440N-Z21US2A 440N-Z21SS2AN 440N-Z21US2AN
10 m 440N-Z21S16B 440N-Z21U16B 440N-Z21S26B 440N-Z21U26B 440N-Z21S17B 440N-Z21U17B 440N-Z21SS2B 440N-Z21US2B 440N-Z21SS2BN 440N-Z21US2BN
440N-Z21U16H
440N-Z21S26H
440N-Z21U26H
440N-Z21S17H
440N-Z21U17H
440N-Z21SS2H
Plastic rectangular/ rectangular actuator 18 mm (0.71 in.) Yes Yes Yes Plastic housing with integrated latch Contact/ latched
Yes (9 N) Adjustable 2060 N
440N-Z21US2H
440N-Z21SS2HN
440N-Z21US2HN
440N-Z21SS2AN9 440N-Z21SS2BN9 440N-Z21SS2HN9 440N-Z21SS3PA 440N-Z21US3PA 440N-Z21SS3PB 440N-Z21US3PB 440N-Z21SS3PH 440N-Z21US3PH
Yes

Description MSR127RP MSR127TP Modular Safety Relays MSR211P Base 2 N.C. only MSR220P Input Module MSR310P Base MSR320P Input Module 2 N.O. MSR300 Series Output Modules 1 N.C. 3 PNP Solid State 2 PNP Solid State Removable Removable Removable Removable Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Monitored Manual 24V DC from the base unit 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC from the base unit 5-84 5-86 5-102 5-106 440R-H23177 440R-H23178 440R-W23219 440R-W23218 Safety Outputs Auxiliary Outputs Terminals Reset Type Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Power Supply Cat. Page No. 5-26 5-26 Cat. No.
440R-N23135 440R-N23132
Single-Function Safety Relays 3 N.O. 1 N.C. Removable (Screw) 24V AC/DC
Connection Systems
Description Cordset Patchcord Safety Wired T-Port Safety Wired Shorting Plug Cat. No. 889D-F8AB-1 889D-F8ABDM898D-438Y-D8 898D-418U-DM
Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard lengths. Note: For additional information, see page 7-1.

R
3-57
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
440N-Z21US2AN9 440N-Z21US2BN9 440N-Z21US2HN9
1-
General
Cable
Connector
Safety Switches
SensaGuard
Accessories
Description To Be Used With Standard coded models only 18 mm plastic actuator Unique coded models only Standard coded models only 30 mm plastic actuator Unique coded models only Standard coded models only 18 mm stainless steel actuator Unique coded models only Standard coded models only Rectangular plastic actuator Unique coded models only Standard coded margin/magnetic hold models only Unique coded margin/magnetic hold models only Integrated latch actuator Standard coded models only Unique coded models only Cat. No. 440N-Z18PT 440N-Z18UPT 440N-Z30PT 440N-Z30UPT 440N-Z18SST 440N-Z18USST 440N-ZPREC 440N-ZUPREC 440N-ZPRECM 440N-ZUPRECM 440N-ZLPREC 440N-ZULPREC
Mountingbracket for tubular proximity sensors right angle style
871A-BRS18
Mounting bracket for tubular sensorsclamp style 18 mm barrel models Snap clamp mounting bracket
871A-BP18
871A-SCBP18
Swivel/tilt bracket allows 10 vertical and 360 rotation adjustment
60-2649
Mounting plate for vertically hinged doors Integrated latch version only Mounting plate for slide and gull wing doors
440N-AHDB
440N-ASDB
3-58
Safety Switches
SensaGuard
16.84 (0.66) 3.17 (0.125)
22.22 (0.87)
4.57 (0.18) Dia.
15.42 (0.61) 3.17 (0.125) 15.87 36.47 19.81 (1.436) (0.62) (0.78) 13.72 (0.54) 4.57 (0.18) Dia. 4.75 (0.187)
14.43 (0.568) 4.57 (0.18) Dia. 2 Places 16.1 (0.634) 13.72 (0.54) 15.87 (0.62) 36.47 (1.436) 15.87 36.47 (0.62) (1.436) 13.72 (0.54) 13.72 (0.54) 18 mm Stainless Steel Actuator
30.4 (1.197)
48.92 (1.926) 19.81 (0.78) 19.81 (0.78)
30 mm Plastic Actuator
22.22 (0.87) 48.92 (1.926)
18 mm Plastic Actuator
15.87 (0.62) 36.47 (1.436)
67.06 (2.64) 2.03 (0.08)
Sensor
M18X1
Large Rectangular Flat Pack

18.54 (0.73) 24.99 (0.984) 20.65 (0.813) 18.54 (0.73) 24.99 (0.984) 20.65 (0.813) 10.67 (0.42) 4.57 (0.18)
77.98 (3.07) 88.14 (3.47) 72.9 (2.87) 68.31 (2.689) 88.14 (3.47)
57.96 (2.28) 62.53 (2.46)
82.55 (3.25)
10.66 (0.42) 7.11 (0.28) 6.78 (0.267)
5.08 (0.2) Dia.
4.57 (0.18) 4.57 (0.18) 13.41 (0.528) 9.96 (0.392) QD Connector Version M12 x 1 9.7 (0.38) Dia.
4.57 (0.18) 5.08 (0.2) Dia.
4.57 (0.18)
Integrated Latch
11.8 (0.46) 30 (1.18)
62.5 (2.46)
7 (0.28)
53.98 (2.13) 75.8 (2.98) 88 (3.46)
8 27 (0.32) (1.06) 21.5 (0.85) 36.5 (1.44)

R
3-59
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
77.98 (3.07)
2-Opto-electronics
1-
General
18 mm Barrel
Safety Switches
SensaGuard
Description Plastic Stainless Steel
8-Pin Micro (M12)
3-N/A 8-Safety A+ 4-Safety B+ 5-Safety A

Grey Red Pink Safety A Safety A+ Safety B Safety B+ Aux A 24V DC + Gnd NA
2-24V DC + 1-Aux A 7-Ground 6-Safety B
3-Shield 8-Safety A+ 4-Safety B+ 5-Safety A

Safety A Safety A+ Safety B Safety B+ Aux A 24V DC + Gnd Shield
2-24V DC + 1-Aux A 7-Ground 6-Safety B
11 10 Sensing Distance 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Side Lobe
Face to Face Distancemm
Face to Face Distancemm
8-Pin Cordset 889D-F8AB-1 or cable version
Yellow White Brown Blue Green
Misalignment Curves
18 mm Stainless Steel Barrel
15 14 13 12 Assured Sensing Distance OFF OFF
18 mm Plastic Barrel
25
35
30 mm Plastic Barrel
30
20 OFF 15 Assured Sensing Distance 10 ON 5 Side Lobe Side Lobe OFF

25 OFF 20 Assured Sensing Distance OFF
ON
15 ON 10 Side Lobe 5 Side Lobe
Side Lobe
OFF 0 -15-14-13 -12-11-10 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Misalignment
0 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 (-0.98)(-0.787) (-0.59) (-0.39) (-0.19)
5 10 15 20 25 (0.19) (0.39) (0.59) (0.787) (0.98)
0 -3 0 (-1.18)
-20 (-0.787)
-10 (-0.39)
10 (0.39)
20 (0.787)
30 (1.18)
Lateral Misalignment Tolerancemm (in)
Lateral Misalignment Tolerancemm (in)
Note: There must be a minimum spacing of 4 Note: There must be a minimum spacing of 4 Note: There must be a minimum spacing of 7 mm (0.157 in.) if actuator and sensor face mm (0.157 in.) if actuator and sensor face mm (0.275 in.) if actuator and sensor face approaches laterally. This will prevent false approaches laterally. This will prevent false approaches laterally. This will prevent false triggering due to the side lobe areas. triggering due to the side lobe areas. triggering due to the side lobe areas.
3-60
Safety Switches
SensaGuard
Large Rectangular Flat Pack
50 40 30 20 50
50 40 30
10 0 10 20 30 40 50
10 0 10
Misalignment (mm)
Misalignment (mm)
Side Lobes Margin of Indication Assured Sensing Distance
40 30 20
Assured Sensing Distance
20 10 0 10 20 30
Side Lobes
20 30 40 50
50
10
15
20
10
15
20
Minimum Distance Between Sensors

18 mm Actuator 50 mm Sensor 1 Stainless Steel Barrel Sensor 2
18 mm Actuator
30 mm Actuator
70 mm
100 mm
Sensor 1 Plastic Barrel Sensor 2
Plastic Barrel
150 mm

R
3-61
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
Sensor 1
Sensor 2
2-Opto-electronics
Sensing Distance (mm)
23
Sensing Distance (mm)
23
1-
40
General
Side Lobes
Safety Switches
SensaGuard
Diagnostic
RTN 24VDC Power +24 Supply 1606 -XL120D
hi te
hi te
hi te
hi te
Blu
Blu
Actuator 1
Actuator 2
Actuator 3
Sensor 1
Sensor 2
Sensor 3
Blu
wn
o Br
Br
ow
Actuator 1
Actuator 2
Actuator 3
Actuator 4
Actuator 5
Switch 1
Blu e
Switch 2
Blu e
Switch 3
Blu
Switch 4
Blu
Switch 5
Blu e
Recoverable fault
Actuator 1 is in sensing range. Switch 1 is functioning properly OSSDs are energize to 24 V Green LED is ON.
Unit Indicators (per IEC 60073)

State Off Red Green Device Output LED Green Flash Red Flash Amber Flash Status Not Powered Not Safe, Output Off Safe, Output On Power Up Test 1 Hz Flash Recoverable Fault 4 Hz Flash Nonrecoverable Fault Safe, Output On, Sensor Is Reaching Max. Sensing Distance Troubleshooting NA NA NA Check 24V DC on Safety + Outputs (yellow and red wire) Recoverable Fault: Check Safety Outputs Are Not Shorted to GND, 24V DC or Each Other. Cycle Power. Re-adjust Distance Between Actuator and Sensor until Output LED Is Green
White
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Gray
Gray
Gray
Gray
Gray
Red
Red
Red
Red
Pink
Red
Pink
Pink
Pink
Pink
Yel
Yel
Yel
Yel
Yel
+24 V +24 V
+24 V +24 V
+0 V +0 V
+0 V +0 V
+0 V +0 V
Actuator 2 is in sensing range. Switch 2 is functioning properly OSSDs are energize to 24 V Green LED is ON.
Actuator 3 is in sensing range. Switch 3 has fault. See Table AboveRed LED is flashing
Actuator 4 is in sensing range. Switch 4 is functioning properly. Series inputs are 0V. OSSDs are de-energized to 0V. Green LED is Flashing to indicate Series inputs are not 24V.
Actuator 5 is in sensing range. Switch 5 is functioning properly. Series inputs are 0V. OSSDs are de-energized to 0V. Green LED is Flashing to indicate Series inputs are not 24V.
OSSDs are OFF
Unit Response Time

RT 24V DC Power +24 Supply 1606
A2
S11 S52 S12
13
23
33
41
Pink Grey White Red Yel Brown
Red Yellow White Pink Grey
Pink Grey White Red Yel
440R-N23126
S21 S22 S34 A1 14 24 34 42
OFF
Initial Conditions: All actuators are in sensing distance.
Actuator 1 is moved out of sensing range.
Sensor 2 drops the 24 volts (red and yellow) from Sensor 1 OSSD outputs. Green LED flashes.
Sensor 3 drops the 24 volts (red and yellow) from Sensor 2 OSSD outputs. Green LED flashes.
0 mS Actuator 1 is out of sensing range. Actuator 1 is moved into sensing Actuator 2 and 3 are in range. sensing range. Sensor 1 OSSD outputs are energized.
54 mS Sensor 2 OSSD inputs (red and yellow) transition to 24V DC from Sensor 1 OSSD outputs. Sensor 2 OSSD outputs are energized
72 mS
90 mS Sensor 3 OSSD inputs (red and yellow) transition to 24V DC from Sensor 2 OSSD outputs. Sensor 3 OSSD outputs are energized.
ON
0 mS
360 mS
378 mS
396 mS
3-62
Safety Switches
SensaGuard
Application Wiring Examples
MSR127RP with One Sensor
+24V DC SensaGuard Unit 1
Blue Pink Gray Brown Red Yellow A1
+24V DC SensaGuard Unit 1 Brown Red Yellow Pink Gray Blue
A1
S11
S52
S12
13
23
33
41
Reset
S11
S52
S12
13
23
33
41
S21
S22
S34
A2
14
24
34
42
S21
S22
S34
A2
14
24
34
42
K1
K2
K1
K2
GND
GND
MSR127RP with Three Sensors

Monitored Reset
+24V DC SensaGuard Unit 1
Brown Red Yellow Pink Gray Blue
Automatic Reset
+24V DC
SensaGuard Unit 2
Brown Red Yellow Pink Gray Blue
SensaGuard Unit 3
Red Yellow Pink Gray Blue Brown
SensaGuard Unit 1
Yellow Pink Gray Blue Brown Red
SensaGuard Unit 2
SensaGuard Unit 3
A1
S11
S52
S12
13
23
33
41
Reset
A1
S11
S52
S12
13
23
33
41
MSR127RP
S21 S22 S34 A2 14 24 34 42
MSR127TP
S21 S22 S34 A2 14 24 34 42
K1
K2
K1
K2
GND
GND
MSR127RP with Two Sensors and One Light Curtain

Monitored Reset
+24V DC SensaGuard Unit 1 Brown Red Yellow Pink Gray Blue
A1 S11 S52 S12 13 23 MSR127RP S21 S22 S34 A2 14 24 34 42 K1 K2
R
Automatic Reset
+24V DC
SensaGuard Unit 2 Brown Red Yellow Pink Gray Blue

33 41
SensaGuard Unit 3 Brown Red Yellow Pink Gray Blue
GuardShield Pink Gray Blue Brown
SensaGuard Unit 1
SensaGuard Unit 2
SensaGuard Unit 3
Guard Shield
Reset
A1
S11
S52
S12
13
23
33
41
MSR127TP
S21 S22 S34 A2 14 24 34 42
K1
K2
Note: Light curtain must be last (farthest from MSR127).
Note: Light curtain must be last (farthest from MSR127).
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-63
Power
Logic
GND
GND
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
1Pink Gray Blue Brown
MSR127RP
MSR127TP
General
Monitored Reset
Automatic Reset
Safety Switches
SensaGuard
MSR200 Series with Three Sensors and One Light Curtain
Manual Reset
+24V DC Brown Brown Yellow Red Blue Blue Pink S12 S20 S42 Pink Blue Blue Pink S12 S20 Red
GuardShield
Gray S32
SensaGuard
Pink Gray 13 23 31 Y40 Y41 Y42 A1 440R-H23180 S12 S20 S32 S32 S12 S20 S32 S51 S11 S21 S31 S41 440R-H23177
440R-H23179
MSR211P S50 S62 Gray
MSR211P S42 S50 S62 S34 Pink Gray Y1 Y2 Y3 14 24 32 Y32 Y33 Y30 A2
MSR230P S42 S50 S62 S32
SensaGuard
Yellow Brown Gray S32 440R-H23179 Brown
SensaGuard
Brown Yellow Red Blue
K1 K2
K2
K4
Reset
K1
K3 GND
Note: Light curtain can be attached to any input.
Automatic Reset
+24V DC Brown Yellow Red Blue
GuardShield
SensaGuard
MSR211P S42 Pink S50 S62 Gray
MSR211P S42 S50 S62 S34 Pink Gray K1 K2 K2 Y1 Y2 Y3 14 24 32 Y32 Y33 Y30 A2
MSR230P S42 S50 S62 S32
SensaGuard
Blue Red Yellow Brown
SensaGuard
K4
K1
K3 GND
Note: Light curtain can be attached to any input
3-64
Safety Switches
SensaGuard
MSR200 Series with Four Sensors
Manual Reset
+24V DC Blue
Blue
R
SensaGuard
Pink S12 S20 Gray S32
SensaGuard
440R-H23179
MSR211P S42 Pink S50 S62 Gray
MSR211P S42 S50 S62 S34 Pink Gray Y1 Y2 Y3 14 24 32 Y32 Y33 Y30 A2
MSR230P S42 S50 S62 S32
SensaGuard
Blue
S12 S42 Pink Red Blue
SensaGuard
K1 K2
K2
K4
Reset
K1
K3 GND
Automatic Reset
+24V DC Yellow S20 Red Brown Gray S32 S62 Gray Yellow Brown Brown Yellow Red Blue
SensaGuard
Pink
SensaGuard
440R-H23179
S50
S42 S50 S62 S34 Pink Gray
Y1
Y2
Y3
14
24
32
Y32 Y33 Y30
A2
S42
S50
S62
S32
SensaGuard
SensaGuard
K1 K2
K2
K4
K1
K3 GND
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-65
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
MSR211P
MSR211P
MSR230P
2-Opto-electronics
1-
General
Red
Yellow Red
Brown Yellow Brown
Brown
Yellow
Red
Blue
Safety Switches
Magnetically Coded
Specifications
MC1 Safety Ratings Standards EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC609475-1, IEC/EN60947-5-3, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 Device per EN 954-1; Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. PFHD: > 3 x 10-7 MTTFd: > 385 years Dual channel interlock may be suitable for performance levels PLe or PLd (according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according to IEC 62061) depending on application characteristics CE Marked for all applicable directives, cULus, and TV 2 N.C. Solid-State Relays 1 x PNP, 0.2 A max.; Status: OFF (0V DC) MC2
With the increasing speed and complexity of applications a simple magnetic switch may be insufficient to meet the increased risks, therefore the design incorporates several magnetically sensitive elements which must be triggered in a particular sequence to operate correctly. The sensor with its molded-in brackets and diminutive size, is extremely versatile and simple to install. For high-risk applications the control unit is used with a single sensor to give a high-integrity system. For other applications, multiple sensors (including mechanical switches) can be connected.
Certifications
Outputs (Guard Door Closed, Actuator in Place) Safety Outputs Auxiliary Outputs Operating Characteristics Operating Distance, Make [mm (in.)] Operating Distance, Break [mm (in.)] Misalignment Tolerance, Min Repeat Accuracy Output Current, Max. 8 (0.3) 15 (0.59) 10 (0.39) 25 (0.98) 2 N.C. REEDS
2-Opto-electronics
Features
Non-contact actuation Magnetic coded sensing High tolerance to misalignment Designed for use with specified controllers
See Misalignment Wire 10% of Sensing Range 200 mA 200 mA 24V DC @ 200 mA +10%/-15% 24V DC, +10%/15%/50 mA max./Class 2 SELV 1 Hz IP 69K
Switching Current @ Voltage, Max. 24V DC @ 200 mA Operating Voltage/Power Supply Frequency of Operating Cycle Environmental Enclosure Type Rating Operating Temperature [C (F)] Relative Humidity Shock Vibration Radio Frequency Physical Characteristics Housing Material Actuator Material Color Molded ABS Molded ABS Red IP67 (NEMA 6P) 595% 1 Hz
-10+55 (+14+131) IEC 68-2, 27, 30 g, 11 ms IEC 68-2-6, 1055 Hz IEC 61000-4-3, IEC 61000-4-6 Ultrador Ultrador
3-66
Safety Switches
Magnetically Coded
Product Selection
Type MC1
Safety Outputs 2 N.C. REEDS
Auxiliary Outputs
Status Indicator No
Connection 10 m Cable 8-Pin Micro (M12)
Cat. No.
440N-Z2NRS1C 440N-Z2NRS1A
440N-Z2NRS1B 440N-Z21W1PH 440N-Z21W1PA 440N-Z21W1PB
MC2
24V DC, +10%/15%/50 mA max.
2 N.C. Solid-State Relays
1 x PNP, 0.2 A max.; Status: OFF (0V DC)
Yes

Single-Function Safety Relays for 2 N.C. Contact Switch MSR127RP MSR127TP Modular Safety Relays MSR210P Base 2 N.C. only MSR220P Input Module MSR310P Base MSR320P Input Module 3 N.O. 3 N.O. 1 N.C. 1 N.C. 1 N.C. and 2 PNP Solid State 3 PNP Solid State 2 PNP Solid State Removable (Screw) Removable (Screw) Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Monitored Manual 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 24V DC from the base unit 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC from the base unit 5-26 5-26
440R-N23135 440R-N23132
MSR300 Series Output Modules
Removable Removable Removable
5-86 5-102 5-106
440R-H23178 440R-W23219 440R-W23218
Connection Systems
Connection to Distribution Box 4-Pin Micro (M12) Description Cordset Patchcord Distribution Box Shorting Plug T-Port 2 N.C. 889D-F4AC-1 889D-F4ACDM898D-4LT-DM4 898D-41LU-DM 898D-43LY-D4 8-Pin Micro (M12) 2 N.C. & 1 N.O. 889D-F8AB-1 889D-F8ABDM
Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths. Replace symbol with 4 or 8 for number of ports. Note: For additional information, see the page 7-1.
Accessories
Description MC1 Spare Actuator MC2 Spare Actuator Cat. No. 440N-A17233 440N-A32114

R
3-67
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
2 N.O.
Removable
5-82
440R-H23176
1-
Description
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Reset Type
Power Supply
Cat. Page No.
Cat. No.
General
Operating Voltage/Input Current
Safety Switches
Magnetically Coded
MC1 13 (0.51) 6 (0.24) 5.5 (0.22) 12 (0.47) 13 (0.51) MC2
24 (0.94)
48 (1.89)
22 (0.87)
22 (0.87)
48 (1.89)
2 x M4 25 (0.98) 12 (0.47)
24 (0.94)
24 (0.94)
4.2
4.8 (0.19)
25 (0.98)
29 (1.14) 48 (1.89) 22 (0.87) 48 (1.89) 4.2 (0.17) Dia. 22 (0.87)
4.2 (0.17) Dia.
2 x M4 4.8 (0.19) 5.5 (0.22) 53 (12.1) 20 (0.79) 5.5 (0.22) 20 (0.79) 29 (1.14)
16.5 (0.65)
16.5 (0.65)

MC1 Description 2 N.C. 2-Safety B MC2 2 N.C. + 1 N.O.
4-Pin Micro (M12)
1-Safety A 4-Safety B
3-Safety A
8-Pin Micro (M12)
3-N/A 8-Safety A+ 4-Safety B+ 5-Safety A
2-Power+ 1-Aux A 7-Ground 6-Safety B

Safety A Safety A Safety B Safety B Aux 24V DC + Gnd NA
Brown
Cordset 889D-F4AC-1 or Cable Version
Blue White Black Grey Red Pink
Safety A Safety B
8-Pin Cordset 889D-F8AB-1 or Cable Version
Yellow White Brown Blue Green
3-68
Safety Switches
Magneticallly Coded
Sensing & Misalignment Curve
MC1
Make-Break Make-Break 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
8 6 4 2 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Sensor Actuator
MC2
Face A Make
MC2 Application Wiring Example

Magnetically Coded Small Flat Pack
+24V
Grey
Red
L1 A1 S11 S52 S12 13 23 33 41
L2
L3
K1 MSR127RP
K2
S21 Yellow
S22
S34
A2
14
24
34
42
Pink
K1
K2
0V

R
3-69
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
Safety A+
Yellow (4) Safety B+
Safety A-
Safety B-
+24v
Aux
Brown (2)
Green (3)
White (1)
Grey (5)
Blue (7)
Pink (6)
Red (8)
N/A
0v
2-Opto-electronics
1-
Break
General
16 14 12 10
16
Safety Switches
Ferrogard 1, 2, 20 & 21
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards Safety Classification EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. PFHD: > 3 x 10-7 MTTFd: > 385 years Dual channel interlock may be suitable for performance levels PLe or PLd (according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according to IEC 62061) depending on application characteristics CE Marked for all applicable directives and cULus FRS1: 1 N.C., FRS2: 1 N.C., FRS20: 2 N.C., FRS21: 2 N.C. FRS1: None, FRS2: 1 N.O., FRS20: None, FRS21: 1 N.O.
Description
The Ferrogard range of magnetically actuated safety switches offers non-contact reliability together with tolerance to misalignment. They are designed to be installed so that when a guard door is opened, the action of the magnetic actuator being removed from the switch opens the N.C. safety contacts which are intended for the isolation of control power to a machine primary control element. The FRS1, FRS2, FRS20, FRS21 are rectangular housings. Sealed to IP67 (NEMA 6P), these Ferrogards are ideal for wet environments. Unlike some magnetic switches the Ferrogards have protected safety contacts to help ensure that they do not fail to danger. In addition, some versions have independent auxiliary signal contacts to indicate the guard condition. All Ferrogards have internal non-resettable overload protection on the safety contact. They should be protected by an external fuse rated as shown in the Specifications table.
Functional Safety Data Note: For up-to-date information, visit http://www.ab.com/Safety/
Certifications
Outputs (Guard Door Closed, Actuator in Place) Safety Outputs Auxiliary Outputs Operating Characteristics Operating Distance, Make [mm (in.)] Operating Distance, Break [mm (in.)] Fuses, External Environmental Enclosure Type Rating Relative Humidity Shock Vibration Radio Frequency Physical Characteristics Actuator/Housing Material Molded ABS plastic FRS 1Sensor: 35 (0.08)/Actuator: 85 (0.19) FRS 2Sensor: 40 (0.09)/Actuator: 85 (0.19) FRS 20Sensor: 43 (0.09)/Actuator: 85 (0.19) FRS 21Sensor: 43 (0.09)/Actuator: 85 (0.19) Red IP67 (NEMA 6P) 595% 50 g 7 g; 50200 Hz IEC 61000-4-3, IEC 61000-4-6 Operating Temperature [C (F)] -10+55 (+14+131) Safety: 12 (0.47); Auxiliary: 15 (0.59) Safety: 23 (0.91); Auxiliary: 26 (1.02) FRS1, 2 & 21: 1.6 A (Bussmann BK/60 A-1.6 A) max. FRS20: 0.4 A (Bussmann BK/60 A-400 mA) max.
Features
Non-contact actuation High tolerance to misalignment High switching current (up to 2 A AC, 1 A DC) Plastic rectangular housing (IP67) Cable or quick-disconnect (QD) connections
Weight [g (lbs)]
Color
3-70
Safety Switches
Ferrogard 1, 2, 20 & 21
Product Selection
Safety Contact Switching Capability Safety Contacts Auxiliary Contacts Connection 2 m Cable 4 m Cable 6 m Cable 8 m Cable 10 m Cable 2 m Cable 1 N.C. 4 m Cable 6 m Cable 250V AC, 2 A max 1 N.O. 8 m Cable 10 m Cable 15 m Cable 20 m Cable 4-Pin Micro QD 2 N.C. 4-Pin Micro QD 2 m Cable 4 m Cable 2 N.C. 1 N.O. 6 m Cable 10 m Cable 6-Pin AC Micro QD 1 N.C. 1 N.O. 24V DC, 1 A 2 N.C. 1 N.O. 2 m Cable 4-Pin Micro QD 4 m Cable 4-Pin Micro QD 2 m Cable 4 m Cable 6 m Cable 6-Pin Micro QD Note: Contacts are described with the guard door closed, that is, actuator in place. Switch is shipped complete with actuator. For connector ratings see 3-9. FRS 21 FRS 2 FRS 20 FRS 21 FRS 20 FRS 2 FRS 1 Type Cat. No. 440N-G02001 440N-G02004 440N-G02022 440N-G02041 440N-G02015 440N-G02002 440N-G02014 440N-G02038 440N-G02033 440N-G02019 440N-G02043 440N-G02040 440N-G02093 440N-G02097 440N-G02055 440N-G02060 440N-G02059 440N-G02098 440N-G02092
440N-G02094
440N-G02085
440N-G02090
440N-G02058 440N-G02077
440N-G02099

R
3-71
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
440N-G02083
2-Opto-electronics
440N-G02061
1-
General
Safety Switches
Ferrogard 1, 2, 20 & 21
Description Safety Outputs Auxiliary Outputs Terminals Removable (Screw) Removable (Screw) Removable Reset Type Power Supply Cat. Page No. Cat. No. Single-Function Safety Relays for 2 N.C. Contact Switch MSR127RP MSR127TP MSR30T 3 N.O. 3 N.O. 1 N.C. 1 N.C. Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Auto. or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Monitored Manual 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 24V DC 5-26 5-26 5-16
440R-N23135 440R-N23132
19 (0.75)
4 (0.16)
5 (0.2)
5 (0.2)
5 (0.2)
60 (2.36)
60 (2.36)
60 (2.36)
76 (2.99)
76 (2.99)
5 (0.2)
2 (0.08) 7 (0.28)
76 (2.99)
2 (0.08)
5 (0.2)
13 (0.51)
8 (0.31)
8 (0.31)
8 (0.31)
19.5 (0.77) = =
440R-N23198
Connection Systems
Connection to Distribution Box 4-Pin Micro (M12) 1 N.C. & 1 N. O. 889D-F4AC-1 889D-F4ACDM898D-P4KT-DM4 898D-41KU-DM 898D-43KY-D4
Accessories
Description Replacement Actuator Cat. No. 440N-A02005
Description
6-Pin Micro (M12) 2 N.C. & 1 N.O. 889R-F6ECA-1 889R-F6ECRM898R-F68MT-A5 898R-P61MU-RM
Cordset Patchcord Distribution Box Shorting Plug T-Port
mm (in) 30 (1.18) = = 15 (0.59) 4 (0.16)
2 (0.08) 5 (0.2)
15 (0.59)
4 (0.16) = 19.5 (0.77) =
19.5 (0.77) = = 30 (1.18)
15 (0.59)
30 (1.18)
3-72
Safety Switches
Ferrogard 1, 2, 20 & 21
FRS1 1 N.C. FRS2 1 N.C. + 1 N.O.
2-Aux A
FRS20 2 N.C.
2-Safety B 1-Safety A 4-Safety B
3-Aux A
FRS21
4-Pin Micro (M12)
1-Safety A 4-Aux A
3-Safety A
3-Safety A
6-Safety B 2-Safety B
6-Pin Micro (M12)
4-Aux A 5-Safety A 1-Safety A
Brown
Cordset 889D-F4AC-1 or Cable Versions
Blue Black White Red/White Red/Black
Safety A Aux A
Safety A Safety B
Safety A
Cordset 889R-F6ECA-1
Red Red/Blue Green Red/Yellow Safety A
Safety B Aux A
Brown Blue
Blue White Yellow Green
Brown Blue Black White
Black White Red Blue Yellow Green
Cable Versions
Safety B Aux A

R
3-73
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
1-
General
2 N.C. + 1 N.O.
Safety Switches
Ferrogard 3, 4 & 5
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards Safety Classification EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. PFHD: > 3 x 10-7 MTTFd: > 385 years Dual channel interlock may be suitable for performance levels PLe or PLd (according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according to IEC 62061) depending on application characteristics CE Marked for all applicable directives and cULus FRS3: 1 N.C., FRS4: 1 N.C., FRS5: 1 N.C. FRS3: 1 N.C., FRS4: 1 N.O., FRS5: None Safety/Auxiliary: FRS 312 (0.47); FRS 4 12 (0.47); FRS 512 (0.47) Safety/Auxiliary: FRS 324 (0.94); FRS 4 10 (0.39); FRS 512 (0.47) 300V DC, 250V AC 0.5 A including inrush 1.6 A quick blow
General
Description
The Ferrogard range of magnetically actuated switches offers noncontact reliability together with tolerance to misalignment. They are designed to be installed so that when a guard door is opened, the action of the magnetic actuator being removed from the switches opens the N.C. safety contacts which are intended for the isolation of control power to a machine primary control element. The FRS 3, 4 and 5 have terminal connections. The user must drill a hole in the housing at a convenient location to allow the wiring to enter the housing. The cover is secured with anti-tamper security screws. Unlike some magnetic switches the Ferrogards have protected safety contacts to help ensure that they do not fail to danger. In addition, some versions have independent auxiliary signal contacts to indicate the guard condition. All Ferrogards have internal non-resettable overload protection on the safety contact. They should be protected by an external fuse rated as shown in the Specifications table.
12-Opto-electronics
Certifications
Outputs (Guard Door Closed, Actuator in Place) Safety Outputs Auxiliary Outputs Operating Characteristics Operating Distance, Make [mm (in.)] Operating Distance, Break [mm (in.)] Auxiliary Contact Switching Capability, Min Safety Contact External Fusing Environmental Enclosure Type Rating Relative Humidity Shock Vibration Radio Frequency Physical Characteristics Housing Material Actuator Material Color Molded ABS plastic Molded ABS plastic Red IP65 (NEMA 13) 595% IEC 68-2-27, 30 g, 11 ms IEC 68-2-6, 10200 Hz IEC 61000-4-3, IEC 61000-4-6 Operating Temperature [C (F)] -10+65 (+14+149)
Features
Non-contact actuation High tolerance to misalignment High switching current (up to 2 A) Various contact arrangements Terminal connections
3-74
Safety Switches
Ferrogard 3, 4 & 5
Product Selection
1 N.C. 250V AC 2 A max Terminals Red Molded ABS Plastic 1 N.C. 1 N.O. Note: Contacts are described with the guard door closed, that is, actuator in place.
FRS 3 FRS 4 FRS 5
440N-G02003 440N-G02008 440N-G02009

Description Safety Outputs Auxiliary Outputs Terminals Removable (Screw) Removable (Screw) Fixed Removable Reset Type Power Supply Cat. Page No. Cat. No. Single-Function Safety Relays MSR127RP MSR127TP MSR126T MSR30T 3 N.O. 3 N.O. 2 N.O. 1 N.C. 1 N.C. None Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Auto./Manual Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Monitored Manual 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 24V DC 5-26 5-26 5-24 5-16
440R-N23135 440R-N23132 440R-N23117
440R-N23198
MSR210P Base 2 N.C. only MSR220P Input Module MSR310P Base MSR320P Input Module
2 N.O. MSR300 Series Output Modules
1 N.C. and 2 PNP Solid State 3 PNP Solid State 2 PNP Solid State
Removable Removable Removable Removable
24V DC from the base unit 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC from the base unit
5-82 5-86 5-102 5-106
440R-H23176 440R-H23178 440R-W23219 440R-W23218
Accessories
Description Replacement Actuator Cat. No. 440N-A02005
50 (1.97) 2 x M4 = = 6 (0.24) 30 (1.18) = = 36 (1.41) 15 (0.59)
57 (2.24)
38.5 (1.52)
69 (2.72)
60 (2.36)
76 (2.99)
5 (0.2)
5 (0.2) 2 (0.08) 7 (0.28)
8 (0.31)
38 (1.5)
19.5 (0.77)

FRS 3
1 2 3
FRS 4
Safety A
1 2 3
FRS 5
Safety A
1 2
Safety A
Aux A
4 4
Aux A

R
3-75
Power
Logic
6 (0.24)
25 (0.98)
4 (0.16)
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
Modular Safety Relays
1-
General
Safety Contact Switching Capability
Connection Type
Housing Material
Safety Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts
Type
Cat. No.
Safety Switches
Ferrogard 6, 9,10, 13 & 14
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. PFHD: > 3 x 10-7 MTTFd: > 385 years Dual channel interlock may be suitable for performance levels PLe or PLd (according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according to IEC 62061) depending on application characteristics CE Marked for all applicable directives and cULus 1 N.C. 1 N.C. 1 N.C.
The Ferrogard range of magnetically actuated safety switches offers non-contact reliability together with tolerance to misalignment. They are designed to be installed so that when a guard door is opened, the action of the magnetic actuator being removed from the switch opens the N.C. safety contact which is intended for the isolation of control power to a machine primary control element. The FRS 6, 9, 10, 13, and 14 sensors and actuators incorporate slim housings to accommodate narrow mounting areas. They are environmentally sealed to IP67 (NEMA 6P), which makes them ideal for wet environments. These Ferrogard switches have two active sensing faces allowing more flexible mounting options. Unlike some magnetic switches the Ferrogards have protected safety contacts to help ensure that they do not fail to danger. All Ferrogards have internal non-resettable overload protection on the safety contact. They should be protected by an external fuse rated as shown in the Specifications table.
Certifications
Outputs (Guard Door Closed, Actuator in Place) Safety Outputs Auxiliary Outputs Operating Characteristics Operating Distance, Make [mm (in.)] Operating Distance, Break [mm (in.)] Environmental Enclosure Type Rating Operating Temperature [C (F)] Relative Humidity Shock Vibration Radio Frequency Physical Characteristics Actuator/Housing Material Weight [g (lb)] Color Molded ABS plastic Sensor/Actuator FRS 628 (0.06)/70 (0.15) FRS 928 (0.06)/70 (0.15) FRS 1028 (0.06)/70 (0.15) Red IP67 (NEMA 6P) -10+65 (+14+149) 595% IEC 68-2-27, 30 g, 11 ms IEC 68-2-6, 1055 Hz IEC 61000-4-3, IEC 61000-4-6 12 (0.47) 23 (0.91)
2-Opto-electronics
Features
Non-contact actuation High tolerance to misalignment High switching current (up to 3 A) Two sensing faces IP67 (NEMA 6P) Rating Slim housings Stainless steel models available
3-76
Safety Switches
Ferrogard 6, 9,10, 13 & 14
Product Selection
2 m Cable 4 m Cable 250V AC, 2 A FRS 6 6 m Cable 10 m Cable 4-Pin Micro QD 24V DC, 1 A 1 N.C. 110V AC, 3 A FRS 10 Red Molded ABS Plastic FRS 9 2 m Cable 4 m Cable 6 m Cable 10 m Cable 4-Pin Micro QD 2 m Cable 4 m Cable 2 m Cable 250V AC, 2 A 1 N.C. 24V DC, 1 A Stainless Steel FRS 14 FRS 13 4 m Cable 4-Pin Micro QD 2 m Cable 4 m Cable 4-Pin Micro QD Note: Contacts are described with the guard door closed, that is, actuator in place.
440N-G02023
440N-G02028 440N-G02032 440N-G02013 440N-G02095

440N-G02044
440N-G02075 440N-G02082 440N-G02089 440N-G02096 440N-G02045 440N-G02088 440N-G02154 440N-G02155 440N-G02160 440N-G02157 440N-G02161

440R-N23135 440R-N23132 440R-N23117
440R-N23198
Connection Systems
Description Cordset Patchcord 4-Pin Micro (M12) 889D-F4AC-1 889D-F4ACDM-
Accessories
Description FRS 6, 9, 10 Plastic Replacement Actuator FRS 13, 14 Stainless Steel Replacement Actuator Cat. No. 440N-A02025 440N-A02165
Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths. Note: For additional information, see page 7-1.

R
3-77
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
440N-G02156
1-
General
Safety Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts
Housing Material
Type
Connection
Cat. No.
Safety Switches
Ferrogard 6, 9,10, 13 & 14
FRS 6, 9, 10
Switch, Cable Version
4.5 (0.18) 19.5 (0.77) 7 (0.28)
4.5 (0.18)
84 (3.31)
73 (2.87)
82 (3.23)
54 (2.13)
73 (2.87)
84 (3.31)
46 (1.81)
46 (1.81)
46 (1.81)
7 (0.28)
16 (0.62)
11 (0.43) 19 (0.75)
4.5 (0.18)
4.5 (0.18)
7 (0.28)
6 (0.23)
= 4 (0.16)
6 (0.24) 16 (0.63)
= 4 (0.16) 11 (0.43) 19 (0.75)
FRS 13, 14
19 (0.75) 6.5 (0.26) 9.5 (0.38)
9.5 (0.38) 9.5 (0.38)
90 (3.54)
54 (2.13) 46 (1.8) 7 (0.28) 46 (1.8)
73 (2.9) 41 (1.6)
= 11 (0.43) 19 (0.75) 16 (0.62)
19.5 (0.77)
6.5 (0.26)
3-78
46 (1.81)
R
12 (0.47)
54 (2.13)
12 (0.47)
13 (0.51)
Actuator
19.5 (0.77) mm (in)
Switch, QD Version
Safety Switches
Ferrogard 6, 9,10, 13 & 14
FRS 6, 9, 10 1 N.C. 2-Aux A FRS 13, 14 2-Aux A 1-Safety A 4-Aux A Safety A Brown Blue Safety A Aux A 3-Safety A
4-Pin Micro (M12)
1-Safety A 4-Aux A Brown
3-Safety A
Cordset 889D-F4AC-1
Blue White Black Safety A
Cable Version
Aux A
Blue Black Grey
External Fuse Safety Contacts

WARNING: All safety contacts fitted with internal non-resettable fuse and must be fused externally as detailed.
Recommended: *Bussman BK/GDA-1.6 A ** Bussman BK/GDA-400 mA ***Bussman BK/GDA-2.5 A AC 1.6 A* (F) IEC 60127-2 DC 0.4 A** (F) IEC 60127-2 AC 2.5 A*** (F) IEC 60127-2
22 + 12 +
Amp Amp
- 21 - 11
FRS 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 13, 21 AC FRS 9, 14, 2 DC, 20 DC, 21 DC FRS 10

R
3-79
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
1-
Brown
General
1 N.C. + 1 N.O.
Safety Switches
Ferrogard GD2
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. PFHD: > 3 x 10-7 MTTFd: > 385 years Dual channel interlock may be suitable for performance levels PLe or PLd (according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according to IEC 62061) depending on application characteristics CE Marked for all applicable directives and cULus 1 N.C. 1 N.O. 2 N.C. 2 N.C. 1 N.O.
The Ferrogard range of magnetically actuated safety switches offers non-contact reliability together with tolerance to misalignment. They are designed to be installed so that when a guard door is opened, the action of the magnetic actuator being removed from the switch opens the N.C. safety contacts which are intended for the isolation of control power to a machine primary control element. The GD2 version has a stainless steel housing for added protection against inadvertent impacts to the housing. The contacts are completely sealed to meet IP68 (NEMA 6P) requirements, making them ideal for wet environments. The GD2 also has a wider temperature range than the plastic Ferrogard switches, making them useful in a wider range of applications. Unlike some magnetic switches, the Ferrogards have protected safety contacts to help ensure that they do not fail to danger. In addition, some versions have independent auxiliary signal contacts to indicate the machine and guard condition. All Ferrogards have internal non-resettable overload protection on the safety contact. They should be protected by an external fuse rated as shown in the Specifications table.
Certifications
Outputs (Guard Door Closed, Actuator in Place) Safety Outputs Auxiliary Outputs Operating Characteristics Operating Distance, Make [mm (in.)] Operating Distance, Break [mm (in.)] Environmental Enclosure Type Rating Operating Temperature [C (F)] Relative Humidity Shock Vibration Radio Frequency Physical Characteristics Housing Material Actuator Material Weight [g (lbs)] Stainless Steel; BS3146 ANC4B (316L) Stainless Steel; BS3146 ANC4B (316L) Sensor: 156 (0.34); Actuator: 168 (0.37) IP68 (NEMA 6P) -25+125 (-13+257) 595% IEC 68-2-27, 30 g, 11 ms IEC 68-2-6, 10200 Hz IEC 61000-4-3, IEC 61000-4-6 Safety: 12 (0.47); Auxiliary: 15 (0.59) Safety: 23 (0.91); Auxiliary: 26 (1.02)
2-Opto-electronics
Features
Non-contact actuation High tolerance to misalignment High switching current (up to 2 A AC, 1 A DC) Wide temperature range (-25+125C (-13+257F)) Stainless steel housing Various contact arrangements
3-80
Safety Switches
Ferrogard GD2
Product Selection
2 N.C. 250V AC, 2 A max. 1 N.C. 2 N.C. 1 N.C. 2 N.C. 24V DC, 1 A max. 2 N.C.
1 N.O. 1 N.O.
3 m Cable 3 m Cable 3 m Cable 3 m Cable 10 m Cable 3 m Cable 3 m Cable 6 m Cable 10 m Cable 8-Pin Micro (M12)
FRS 20 GD2 FRS 2 GD2 FRS 21 GD2 FRS 2 GD2 FRS 2 GD2 FRS 20 GD2 FRS 21 GD2 FRS 21 GD2 FRS 21 GD2 FRS 21 GD2
440N-G02113 440N-G02112 440N-G02117 440N-G02118 440N-G02147 440N-G02119

440N-G02123
1 N.O.
440N-G02143 440N-G02137
440N-G02149
Note: Contacts are described with the guard door closed, that is, actuator in place. Switch is shipped with complete actuator.

440R-N23135 440R-N23132 440R-N23117
440R-N23198
Modular Safety Relays MSR210P Base 2 N.C. only MSR220P Input Module MSR310P Base MSR320P Input Module 2 N.O. MSR300 Series Output Modules 1 N.C. and 2 PNP Solid State 3 PNP Solid State 2 PNP Solid State Removable Removable Removable Removable 24V DC from the base unit 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC from the base unit 5-82 5-86 5-102 5-106 440R-H23176
440R-W23219 440R-W23218
Description Cordset Patchcord
8-Pin Micro (M12) 889D-F8AB-1 889D-F8ABDM-
Description Actuator
Cat. No. 440N-A02128

R
3-81
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
Connection Systems
Accessories
440R-H23178
2-Opto-electronics
1-
General
Safety Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts
Connection
Type
Cat. No.
Safety Switches
Ferrogard GD2
Dimensions are shown in mm (in.). Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. Switch
6 (0.24) mm (in) 8 (0.31) 33.5 (1.32) 8 (0.31) 16 (0.63) = = 16.75 (0.66)
Actuator
7 (0.28)
4.4 (0.17)
39.25 (1.55)
8 (0.31)
11.5 (0.45)
62.5 (2.46)
78.5 (3.09)
62.5 (2.46)
11.5 (0.45)
39.25 (1.55)
5 (0.2) =
16.75 (0.66) = 7 (0.28)
19.5 (0.77)
16.75 (0.66) = 7 (0.28)
16 (0.63) 19.5 (0.77) = =
4.4 (0.17)
33.5 (1.32)
3-82
78.5 (3.09)
5 (0.2)
Safety Switches
Ferrogard GD2
FRS21 Description Safety A Safety B Aux A Shield Gnd 3-Ground 8-Aux A 2 N.C. + 1 N.O. Black White Red Blue Yellow Green 2-Safety A 1-Safety A 7-NA 6-Safety B Safety A Safety B Safety B NA FRS2 1 N.C. + 1 N.O. Blue Red Yellow Green Green/Yellow FRS20 Brown Blue Black White Green/Yellow
Cable Versions
8-Pin Micro (M12)
5-Safety B Brown White
Green Blue
FRS 2 GD2 FRS20 GD2 FRS21 GD2

22 + 12 + Amp Amp - 21 - 11
AC 1.6 A* (F) IEC 60127-2
FRS 2 GD2 FRS 20 GD2 FRS21 GD2
DC 0.4 A** (F) IEC 60127-2
Recommended: *Bussman BK/GDA-1.6 A ** Bussman BK/GDA-400 mA

R
3-83
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
Cordset 889D-F8AB-1
Grey Pink Yellow Red
1-
4-Aux A
General
2 N.C.
Safety Switches
Ferrogard GS1 & GS2
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. PFHD: > 3 x 10-7 MTTFd: > 385 years Dual channel interlock may be suitable for performance levels PLe or PLd (according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according to IEC 62061) depending on application characteristics GS1 & GS2 - CE Marked for all applicable directives and cULus GS2 Ex - EExd IIC T6 Baseefa 1 N.C.
Description
The Ferrogard range of magnetically actuated safety switches offers non-contact reliability together with tolerance to misalignment. They are designed to be installed so that when a guard door is opened, the action of the magnetic actuator being removed from the switch opens the N.C. safety contacts which are intended for the isolation of control power to a machine primary control element. The GS1 and GS2 are designed for heavy duty applications. The GS1 is housed in a stainless steel or brass housing. The GS2 offers the same characteristic as the GS1, but in an Ex Range housing for hazardous locations. Unlike some magnetic switches the Ferrogards have protected safety contacts to help ensure that they do not fail to danger. All Ferrogards have internal non-resettable overload protection on the safety contact. They should be protected by an external fuse rated as shown in the Specifications table. See Other Safety Products section on page 9-1 for more information on the Ex Range version of the Ferrogard GS2.
Certifications
Outputs (Guard Door Closed, Actuator in Place) Safety Outputs Auxiliary Outputs Operating Characteristics Operating Distance, Make [mm (in.)] Operating Distance, Break [mm (in.)] Environmental Enclosure Type Rating Operating Temperature [C (F)] Relative Humidity Shock Vibration Radio Frequency Physical Characteristics Housing Material Weight [g (lbs)] Stainless Steel or Brass GS1 Brass: 381 (0.84) GS1 Steel: 388 (0.86) Actuator: 116 (0.26) IP68 (NEMA 6P) GS1: -25+125 (-13+257) GS2: -40+60 (-40146) 595% IEC 68-2-27, 30 g, 11 ms IEC 68-2-6, 1055 Hz IEC 61000-4-3, IEC 61000-4-6 GS1: 12 (0.47); GS2: 15 (0.59) GS1: 23 (0.91); GS2: 26 (1.02)
Features
Non-contact actuation High tolerance to misalignment High switching current (2 A AC) Metal housings (IP68) Ex Range version available
3-84
Safety Switches
Ferrogard GS1 & GS2
Product Selection
Safety Contact Switching Capability Safety Contacts Auxiliary Contacts Connection 2 m Cable 250V AC, 2 A 1 N.C. None 3 m Cable Housing Material Brass Stainless Steel Brass Stainless Steel Type GS 1 GS2-Ex (brass) GS2-Ex (stainless steel) Cat. No. 440N-G02048 440N-G02049 440N-H02046 440N-H02047
Note: Contacts are described with the guard door closed, that is, actuator in place. Switch is shipped with complete actuator.

Description Safety Outputs Auxiliary Outputs Terminals Removable (Screw) Removable (Screw) Fixed Removable Reset Type Power Supply Cat. Page No. Cat. No.
MSR127RP MSR127TP MSR126T MSR30T
3 N.O. 3 N.O. 2 N.O.
1 N.C. 1 N.C. None
Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Auto./Manual Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Monitored Manual
24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 24V DC
5-26 5-26 5-24 5-16
440R-N23135 440R-N23132 440R-N23117
Accessories
Description Actuator, Alnico Actuator, Epoxy-painted Used with Brass Switch Stainless Steel Cat. No. 440N-A02056 440N-A02057

Cable
Brown Safety A Blue
19 (0.75)

GS1 GS2 AC 1.6 A* (F) IEC 60127-2
Ferrogard GS1
Ferrogard Actuator
Ferrogard GS2
12 (0.47) 11 (0.43) 114.5 (4.51) 54 (2.13) 67 (2.64) 17 (0.67) 127 (5.0)
33.5 (1.32)
60 (2.36)
6.5 (0.26)
30 (1.18)
19 (0.75)
13 (0.51)
6.5 (0.26)
7 (0.28)
22 (0.87)
16 (0.63)
25 (0.98)
20 (0,79)

R
3-85
Power
Logic
46 (1.81)
54 (2.13)
Recommended: *Bussman BK/GDA-1.6 A
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
440R-N23198
1-
Single-Function Safety Relays
General
Safety Switches
Sipha Sensors
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC60947-51, IEC/EN60947-5-3, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1 Rating dependent on control unit and application. B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. PFHD: > 3 x 10-7 MTTFd: > 385 years Dual channel interlock may be suitable for performance levels PLe or PLd (according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according to IEC 62061) depending on application characteristics CE Marked for all applicable directives, cULus, and TV 300V DC, 250V AC, 0.5 A including inrush. 15V A/10 W suitable for AC/DC circuits Style Style Style Style Style Style Style Style S1: S2: S3: S4: S1: S2: S3: S4: 5 (0.20) 9 (0.35) 5 (0.20) 10 (0.39) 11 12 12 13 (0.43) (0.47) (0.47) (0.51)
General
Description
With the increasing speed and complexity of applications a simple magnetic switch may be insufficient to meet the increased risks, therefore Siphas design incorporates several magnetically sensitive elements which must be triggered in a particular sequence to operate correctly. The Sipha sensor, designed to operate with its own actuator, helps prevent defeatability by a simple magnet. The Sipha with its molded-in brackets and diminutive size, is extremely versatile and simple to install. The Sipha sensor must be connected to the Sipha control unit giving a monitored circuit. For high-risk applications the control unit is used with a single sensor to give a high-integrity system. For other applications, multiple sensors (including mechanical switches) can be connected to one Sipha control unit. Sipha has facilities for connecting a manual reset button and for monitoring external devices such as contactors. Four types of sensors and actuators are available incorporating different operating distances and physical sizes.
Functional Safety Data Note: For up-to-date information, visit http://www.ab.com/Safety/
12-Opto-electronics
Certifications
Outputs (Guard Door Closed, Actuator in Place) Auxiliary Output Switching Operating Characteristics Sensing Distance, Make [mm (in.)]
Sensing Distance, Break [mm (in.)] Environmental
Features
Non-contact actuation Magnetic coded sensing Four housing styles Must be operated with its own safety control unit
Enclosure Type Rating Operating Temperature [C (F)] Vibration Shock Physical Characteristics Cable Size
IP67 (NEMA 6P) S1, S2, S3: -10+55 (+14+131) S4 (GD2): -25+125 (-13+257) 1 mm, 1055 Hz 30 g, 11 ms half-sine 0.54 mm2 (20 AWG) 4-wire PVC Jacket OD4 mm (0.16 in.) S1, S2: Molded ABS S30 (Actuator): Polyester S31 (Sensor): Nylon (Trogamid) S4 (GD2): Stainless Steel Any position S1: S2: S3: S4: Sensor: Sensor: Sensor: Sensor: 18 (0.04); Actuator: 15 (0.03) 20 (0.04); Actuator: 30 (0.07) 18 (0.04) Actuator: 6 (0.01) 150 (0.33); Actuator: 170 (0.37)
Material Mounting Weight [g (lbs)]
3-86
Safety Switches
Sipha Sensors
Product Selection
None 1 N.C. 1 N.O. ABS plastic None 1 N.C. 1 N.O.
S11 S12 S13 S21 S22 S23
3 m Cable 10 m Cable 3 m Cable 10 m Cable 3 m Cable 10 m Cable 3 m Cable 10 m Cable 3 m Cable 10 m Cable 3 m Cable 10 m Cable
440N-S32014
440N-S32016 440N-S32022 440N-S32032 440N-S32037 440N-S32036 440N-S32015 440N-S32017 440N-S32023 440N-S32033 440N-S32038 440N-S32039
S1
S2 Actuator: Polyester Sensor: Nylon [Trogamid] S3
1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
None
S31
3 m Cable
440N-S32101
4-Pin Micro (M12) 8-Pin Micro (M12) 1 N.C. Stainless Steel 1 N.O. S43 S42 3 m Cable 10 m Cable 8-Pin Micro (M12) 3 m Cable 10 m Cable
440N-S32024
440N-S32047
440N-S32055 440N-S32056 440N-S32046 440N-S32053 440N-S32054
S4

Housing Supply Voltage Safety Contacts Auxiliary Contacts Housing Width Type Cat. Page No. Cat. No.
24V AC/DC
1 N.O.
1 N.C. Solid State
22.5 mm
Control Unit 1
440N-S32013
2 N.O.
1 N.C.
45 mm
Control Unit 2
5-74
440N-S32021
24V AC/DC; 115/230V AC
2 N.O. + 1 N.O. delayed
1 N.C.
90 mm
Sipha 6
440N-S32052
Connection Systems
Description Cordset Patchcord 4-Pin Micro (M12) 889D-F4ECA-1 889D-F4ECRM8-Pin Micro (M12) 889D-F8AB-1 889D-F8ABDM-

R
3-87
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
24V AC/DC; 115/230V AC
2-Opto-electronics
1-
General
Housing Style
Housing Material
Safety Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts
Type
Connection
Cat. No.
Safety Switches
Sipha Sensors
Dimensions are shown in mm (in.). Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. Sipha S1
13 (0.51) 6 (0.24) 5.5 (0.22) 12 (0.47) 13 (0.51) mm (in) 4.8 (0.19) 24 (0.94)
Sipha S2
mm (in) 4.2 (0.17) 8 = (0.31) 4.2 (0.17) 4.5 (0.18) 9 (0.35) = 7 (0.28)
48 (1.89)
22 (0.87)
48 (1.89)
22 (0.87)
7 (0.28)
24 (0.94)
24 (0.94)
4.2
41 (1.61)
82 (3.23)
82 (3.23)
2 x M4 25 (0.98) 12 (0.47)
2 x M4 4.8 (0.19)
68 (2.68)
41 (1.61)
73 (2.87)
Sipha S11, S12, S13
Sipha S10
7 (0.28)
4.5 (0.18) 5 (0.2) 19 (0.75)
5 (0.2) 19 (0.75) Sipha S21, S22, S23
7 (0.28) 19 (0.75) Sipha S20 19 (0.75)
Sipha S3
mm (in) 60 (2.36) 49 (1.93)
Sipha S4
mm (in) 8 (0.31) 4.4 (0.17) 8 (0.31) 6 (0.24) 8 (0.31) 33.5 (1.32) = = 16 (0.63)
11.5 (0.45)
11.5 (0.45)
41 (1.61)
41 (1.61)
62.5 (2.46)
78.5 (3.09)
62.5 (2.46)
Sipha S31 10 (0.39)
M18
30 (1.18)
5 (0.2)
= 5.1 (0.2) Sipha S30
19.5 (0.77) = =
16 (0.63) =
4.4 (0.17) 19.5 (0.77) =
33.5 (1.32) Sipha S42, S43 Sipha S40
Accessories
Description Actuator S10 Actuator S20 Actuator S30 Actuator S40 (GD2) Bag of 40 washers for S2 models Cat. No. 440N-A32019 440N-A32020 440N-A32025 440N-A32041 440N-A17127
3-88
78.5 (3.09)
25 (0.98)
5 (0.2)
Safety Switches
Sipha Sensors
S11, S21 Description Red Blue Yellow 1 N.O. + 1 N.C. Safety A_N.C. Safety B_N.O. S31
2-Safety B NO
S42, S12, S22 2 N.C. + 1 N.O. Safety A_N.C. Safety B_N.O. Aux A_N.C. External Ground S42
S43, S13, S23
Safety A_N.C. Safety B_N.O. Aux A_N.O. External Ground S43
Cable Versions
Green Black White Green/Yellow
Description
4-Pin Micro (M12)
1-Safety A NC Safety B NO
3-Safety A NC
3-Ground 8-Safety B N.O.
2-Safety A N.C. 1-Safety A N.C. 7-NA 6-Aux A N.C.
3-Ground 8-Safety B N.O. 4-Safety B N.O. 5-Aux A N.O.
2-Safety A N.C. 1-Safety A N.C.
8-Pin Micro (M12)

Brown
4-Safety B N.O. 5-Aux A N.C.
4-Pin Cordset 889D-F4AC-1
Blue White Black White Brown
Safety A_N.C. Safety B_N.O. Safety A Safety B Aux A NA
Safety A_N.C. Safety B_N.O. Aux A_N.C. Gnd
Safety A_N.C. Safety B_N.O. Aux A_N.O. Gnd
Red Yellow Grey Pink Green Blue

R
3-89
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
7-NA 6-Aux A N.O.
1-
General
1 N.C. + 2 N.O.
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches
Sprite
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN602041, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 device per EN 954-1 May be suitable for use in Cat 3 or Cat 4 systems depending on the architecture and application characteristics B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. load PFHD: < 3 x10-7 MTTFd: > 385 years May be suitable for use in performance levels Ple or Pld systems (according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according to IEC 62061) depending on the architecture and application characteristics CE Marked for all applicable directives, cULus NRTL/C and TV 2 N.C. directopening action 1 N.C. directopening action 1 N.O.
The Sprite is a hinge-actuated safety interlock switch in a compact housingonly 75 x 25 x 29 mm (2.95 x 0.98 x 1.14 in.)making it the smallest interlock currently available. The Sprite has been designed for smaller machines such as printing machines, copiers and domestic machinery, which until now, have been able to use standard safety interlocks due to space restrictions. Despite its small size, the Sprite includes the necessary safety-related functions, such as forced-guided contacts and a tamper-resistant mechanism allowing machinery to be safeguarded in compliance with the machinery directive. The shaft of the Sprite is connected to the existing hinge pin and the degree of operation can be adjusted to suit the application via the adjustable cam in the switch head.
Certifications Outputs Safety Contacts Auxiliary Contacts
2-Opto-electronics
Maximum 11; Minimum 3 Shaft Rotation for Contact Operation (adjustable) Thermal CurrentIlth Rated Insulation Voltage Switching Current @ Voltage, Min. Utilization Category A600/AC-15 DC-13 Operating Characteristics Break Contact Force, Min. Actuation Speed, Max. Actuation Frequency, Max. Operating Life @ 100 mA load Environmental Enclosure Type Rating Operating Temperature [C (F)] Physical Characteristics Housing Material Shaft Material Weight [g (lb)] Color UL Approved glass-filled PBT Stainless Steel 80 (0.176) Red IP67 -20+80 (-4176) 8 cNm (torque on shaft) 160 mm (6.29 in.)/s 1 cycle/s 1,000,000 operations (Ue) 600V (le) 1.2 A (Ue) 24V (le) 2 A 500V 1.4 A 240V 3A 120V 6A 10 A (Ui) 500V 5 mA @ 5V DC
IMPORTANT: After adjustment, the cam must be secured in position with the supplied cam locking pin to ensure optimal performance.
Features
Ideal for small, light-weight guards The smallest hinge interlock switch available, 75 x 25 mm case Degree of operation can customized with adjustable cam Contacts, 2 N.C. or 1 N.C. & 1 N.O. Four possible shaft positions, easy to install
3-90
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches
Sprite
Product Selection
Contact M16 Conduit Cat. No. Connect to ArmorBlock Guard I/O 5-Pin Micro (M12) 440H-S2NNPPS 440H-S2NNHPS
Safety
Auxiliary
Action
Shaft Type Solid
Actuator Shaft Dimensionsmm (in) 80 x 10 (3.14 x 0.39) 60 x 8 (2.36 x 0.31) 50 x 10(1.96 x 0.39) 30 x 16 (1.18 x 0.63) bore 9.5 (0.37) 80 x 10 (3.14 x 0.39) 60 x 8 (2.36 x 0.31) 50 x 10(1.96 x 0.39) 30 x 16 (1.18 x 0.63) bore 9.5 (0.37)
M16 440H-S34019 440H-S34020 440H-S34010 440H-S34033 440H-S34021 440H-S34022 440H-S34012 440H-S34036
1/2 inch NPT Adaptor 440H-S34023 440H-S34024 440H-S34017 440H-S34034 440H-S34025 440H-S34026 440H-S34018
4-Pin Micro (M12) 440H-S34027 440H-S34028 440H-S34014 440H-S34035 440H-S34029 440H-S34030 440H-S34015
2 N.C.
Pre-Bored
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM Pre-Bored
For connector ratings, see page 3-9.

Description MSR127RP MSR127TP MSR9T MSR30RT MSR33RT Safety Outputs 3 N.O. 3 N.O. 2 N.O. 2 N.O. Solid State 2 N.O. Solid State Auxiliary Outputs 1 N.C. 1 N.C. 1 N.C. 1 N.O. Solid State 1 N.O. Terminals Removable (Screw) Removable (Screw) Fixed Removable Removable Reset Type Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Auto./Manual Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto. or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Monitored Manual Power Supply 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 24V DC 24V DC SELV Cat. Page No. 5-26 5-26 5-14 5-16 5-18 Cat. No.
440R-N23135 440R-N23132
440R-F23027 440R-N23198 440R-F23200
MSR210P Base 2 N.C. only MSR220P Input Module MSR310P Base MSR320P Input Module
2 N.O. MSR300 Series Output Modules
1 N.C. and 2 PNP Solid State 3 PNP Solid State 2 PNP Solid State
Removable Removable Removable Removable
24V DC from the base unit 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC from the base unit
5-82 5-86 5-102 5-106
440R-H23176 440R-H23178 440R-W23219 440R-W23218
Connection Systems
4-Pin Micro (M12) Description Cordset Patchcord Distribution Box Shorting Plug T-Port 2 N.C. 889D-F4AC-1 889D-F4ACDM889D-4LT-DM4 889D-41LU-DM 889D-43LY-D4 1 N.C. & 1 N.O. 889D-F4AC-1 889D-F4ACDM898D-F4KT-DM4 898D-41KU-DM 898D-43KY-D4 5-Pin Micro (M12) for ArmorBlock Guard I/O 2 N.C. 889D-F5ACDM-1

R
3-91
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
Modular Safety Relays
2-Opto-electronics
1-
Solid
General
Connector
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches
Sprite
# = mm (in) 2 x M4 1 x M16 29 (1.14) 75 (2.95) 25 (0.98)
18 (0.71)
16.5 (0.65)
12.5 (0.49)
3 (0.12) 34.5 (1.36) 36 (1.42)
mm (in)
A, 10 (0.39) 8 (0.31) 10 (0.39)
B 80 (3.14) 60 (2.36) 50 (1.96)
12.5 (0.49)
3 (0.12)
12.5 (0.49)
Hollow Shaft
5 (0.2)
2 holes 3.2 (0.12) Dia. 30 (1.18) 25.5 (1.0) 5 (0.2) 8 (0.31) 2 holes M4 in line Note: 2D, 3D and electrical drawings are available on www.ab.com. 16 (0.63) Dia. 9.5 (0.37) Dia.
13 (0.51)
3-92
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches
Sprite
11 12 Safety A (NC) 11 12 Safety A (NC)
23
24
Aux A (NO)
21
22
Safety B (NC)
Contact Action
3.3
0 mm Safety A Safety B 2-Aux A
Open
Closed
Safety A Aux A 3.8
3.3
0 mm
2-Safety B 1-Safety A 4-Safety B 5-Safety B 2-Safety A 1-Safety A 3-N/A 4-Safety B 3-Safety A
4-Pin Micro (M12)
1-Safety A 4-Aux A
3-Safety A
Brown Cordset 889D-F4AC-1 Blue White Black
Safety A Aux A
Safety A Safety B

R
3-93
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
1-
General
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches
Ensign 3
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN602041, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 device per EN 954-1 dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. load PFHD: < 3 x10-7 MTTFd: > 385 years May be suitable for use in performance levels Ple or Pld systems (according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according to IEC 62061) depending on the architecture and application characteristics CE Marked for all applicable directives, cULus, and TV 3 N.C. directopening action 2 N.C. directopening action 1 N.O.
The Ensign 3 is a hinge-actuated safety-interlock switch designed to fit at the hinge point of guards. With its rotatable head, the versatile Ensign 3 offers up to four different mounting options. Operation of the unit is achieved by the hinging action of the guard. The actuation shaft is connected to the existing hinge pin and the degree of operation can be adjusted to suit the application via the adjustable cam in the switch head.
Certifications Outputs Safety Contacts Auxiliary Contacts
2-Opto-electronics
IMPORTANT: After adjustment, the cam must be secured in position with the supplied cam locking pin to ensure safety function performance.
The switch includes the necessary safety-related functions, such as forced-guided contacts and a tamper-resistant mechanism, allowing machinery to be safeguarded in compliance with the machinery directive. It is sealed to IP67 and has one conduit entry, M16 or connector style.
3 N.C. Adjustable 12 max.: 3 min. 2 N.C. 1 N.O. (BBM) Adjustable Shaft Rotation for Contact Operation 14 max.: 5 min. 2 N.C. 1 N.O. (MBB) Adjustable 12 max.: 3 min. Thermal CurrentIlth Rated Insulation Voltage Switching Current @ Voltage, Min. Utilization Category A600/AC-15 DC-13 (Ue) 600V (le) 1.2 A (Ue) 24V (le) 2 A Operating Characteristics Break Contact Force, Min. Actuation Speed, Max. Actuation Frequency, Max. Operating Life @ 100 mA load Environmental Enclosure Type Rating Operating Temperature [C (F)] Physical Characteristics Housing Material Shaft Material Weight [g (lb)] Color UL Approved glass-filled PBT Stainless Steel 100 (0.22) Red IP67 -20+80 (-4176) 8 cNm (torque on shaft) 160 mm (6.29 in.)/s 1 cycle/s 1,000,000 operations 500V 1.4 A 240V 3A 120V 6A 10 A (Ui) 500V 5 mA @ 5V DC
Features
Compact size90.5 x 31 x 30.4 mm (3.56 x 1.22 x 1.2 in) housing Ideal for small, lightweight guards Degree of operation can be customized with adjustable cam Contacts, 2 N.C. & 1 N.O. or 3 N.C. (sealed to IP67) Four possible shaft positions, easy to install Solid and hollow shafts available
3-94
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches
Ensign 3
Product Selection
Contact M16 Conduit Cat. No. Connect to ArmorBlock Guard I/O 5-Pin Micro (M12) 1
Safety
Auxiliary
Action
Actuator Shaft Dimensions mm (in) 80 x 10 (3.14 x 0.39) 60 x 8 (2.36 x 0.31)
Shaft Type Solid
M16
1/2 inch NPT Adaptor
6-Pin Micro (M12)
440H-E22025 440H-E22050 440H-E22059 440H-E22031 440H-E22051 440H-E22060
3 N.C.
50 x 10 (1.96 x 0.39) 30 x 16 (1.18 x 0.63) bore 9.5 (0.37) 80 x 10 (3.14 x 0.39) 60 x 8 (2.36 x 0.31) Solid Pre-bored
440H-E22047 440H-E22052 440H-E22061 440H-E2NNPPS 440H-E22067 440H-E22068 440H-E22069 440H-E2NNHPS 440H-E22027 440H-E22053 440H-E22037 440H-E22033 440H-E22054 440H-E22039 440H-E22048 440H-E22055 440H-E22062 Pre-bored 440H-E22064 440H-E22065 440H-E22066 440H-E22029 440H-E22056 440H-E22038 Solid 440H-E22035 440H-E22057 440H-E22040 440H-E22049 440H-E22058 440H-E22063 Pre-bored 440H-E22070 440H-E22071 440H-E22072
BBM
50 x 10 (1.96 x 0.39) 30 x 16 (1.18 x 0.63) bore 9.5 (0.37) 80 x 10 (3.14 x 0.39) 60 x 8 (2.36 x 0.31)
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
MBB
50 x 10 (1.96 x 0.39) 30 x 16 (1.18 x 0.63) bore 9.5 (0.37)
1 With a 5-pin micro (M12) connector, not all contacts are connected. See page 3-97 for wiring details.
For connector ratings, see 3-9.

Description MSR127RP MSR127TP MSR126T MSR30RT Safety Outputs 3 N.O. 3 N.O. 2 N.O. 2 N.O. Solid State Auxiliary Outputs 1 N.C. 1 N.C. None 1 N.O. Solid State Terminals Removable (Screw) Removable (Screw) Fixed Removable Reset Type Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Auto./Manual Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Monitored Manual Power Supply 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 24V DC Cat. Page No. 5-26 5-26 5-24 5-16 Cat. No.
440R-N23135 440R-N23132 440R-N23117
440R-N23198
Connection Systems
Description Cordset Patchcord Distribution Box Shorting Plug
3 N.C.-2 N.C. & 1 N.O. 889R-F6ECA- 889R-F6ECRM- 898R-P68MT-A5 898R-P61MU-RM
3 N.C. 889D-F5ACDM-
Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths. Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths. Note: For additional information, see page 7-1.

R
3-95
Power
Logic
6-Pin Micro
Connections to ArmorBlock Guard I/O 5-Pin Micro (M12)
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
1-
General
Connector
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches
Ensign 3
2 x M4 1 x M16
20 (0.79) 22 (0.87)
25 (0.98)
34.4 (1.35) 36.4 (1.43) 38.4 (1.51) B 90.5 (3.56)
mm (in)
A, 10 (0.39) 8 (0.31) 10 (0.39)
B 80 (3.14) 60 (2.36) 50 (1.96)
13 (0.51)
12.5 (0.49)
3 (0.12)
Hollow Shaft
2-Opto-electronics
5 (0.2) 2 holes 3.2 (0.12) Dia. 30 (1.18) 25.5 (1.0) 5 (0.2) 9.5 (0.37) Dia.
13 (0.51) 8 (0.31)
2 holes M4 in line
16 (0.63) Dia.
3-96
25 (0.98)
30.4 (1.2)
31 (1.22)
General 13-Interlock Switches Operator Interface Logic Power
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches
Ensign 3
11 21 33 12 22 34
Safety A Safety B Aux A
11 21 31
12 22 32
Safety A Safety B Safety C
0 Safety A Safety B Safety C
Contact Action
BBM
Open
Closed
Safety A Safety B Aux A 3
MBB 5-Safety B 5-Pin Micro (M12) For ArmorBlock Guard I/O 3-NA 3-Aux A 6-Pin Micro (M12) 4-Aux A 5-Safety A 1 Red/White 5 Red/Black Cordset 889R-F6ECA-1 2 Red 6 Red/Blue 3 Green 4 Red/Yellow Safety A Safety B Aux A 1-Safety A 6-Safety B 2-Safety B 2-Safety A 1-Safety A 4-Safety B 6-Safety B 2-Safety B
3-Safety C 4-Safety C 5-Safety A Safety A Safety B Safety C
1-Safety A

R
3-97
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
1-
General
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches
Rotacam
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN602041, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. load PFHD: < 3 x10-7 MTTFd: > 385 years May be suitable for use in performance levels Ple or Pld systems (according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according to IEC 62061) depending on the architecture and application characteristics CE Marked for all applicable directives, cULus, SUVA, and TV 2 N.C. direct opening action 1 N.O. 11 maximum; 5 minimum, (adjustable) 10 A (Ui) 500V 5 mA @ 5V DC 500V 1.4 A 240V 3A 120V 6A
The Rotacam is heavy-duty, hinge-actuated safety-interlock switch. It can be used as, or connected to, the existing hinge pin for direct operation of the switch. Machine power is isolated when the guard has been opened just 5. For applications requiring a larger degree of operation, the internal cam can be adjusted from 511.
Certifications Outputs Safety Contacts Auxiliary Contacts Shaft Rotation for Contact Operation Thermal CurrentIlth Rated Insulation Voltage Switching Current @ Voltage, Min. Utilization Category A600/AC-15 DC-13 Operating Characteristics Break Contact Force, Min. Actuation Speed, Max. Actuation Frequency, Max. Operating Life @ 100 mA load Environmental Enclosure Type Rating Operating Temperature [C (F)] Physical Characteristics Housing Material Shaft Material Weight [g (lb)] Color
2-Opto-electronics
IMPORTANT: After adjustment, the cam must be secured in position with the supplied cam locking pin to ensure optimal performance.
The Rotacam is available with two N.C. safety contacts and one N.O. auxiliary contact. The switch includes the necessary safetyrelated functions, such as forced-guided contacts and a tamperresistant mechanism, allowing machinery to be safeguarded in compliance with the machinery directive. The die-cast housing is sealed to IP66 and features one M20 conduit entry (1/2 inch NPT and connector style also available). Two different shaft lengths of 30 mm and 85 mm can also be specified. EX and Pneumatic styles of Rotacam are also available; see page 9-10 for more information.
(Ue) 600V (le) 1.2 A (Ue) 24V (le) 2 A
12 cNm (torque on shaft) 160 mm (6.29 in.)/s 1 cycle/s >1,000,000 operations IP66 -20+80 (-4176) Heavy-duty die-cast alloy Stainless Steel 420 (0.926) Red
Features
Can be used as a hinge pin on light- and medium-weight guard doors Isolates power within 5 of door movement Degree of operation can be customized with adjustable cam Robust die-cast case, ideal for heavy-duty applications Contacts, 2 N.C. & 1 N.O.
3-98
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches
Rotacam
Product Selection
Cat. No. 1/2 inch NPT Adaptor 8-Pin Micro (M12)
Safety Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts
Contact Action
Shaft Dimensions L = 30 (1.18) D = 16 (0.63) L = 85 (3.35) D = 12.7 (0.5)
Operating Shaft Type Pre-Bored Solid
M20
440H-R03074 440H-R03078 440H-R03111 440H-R03079 440H-R03088 440H-R03112
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
For connector ratings, see 3-9.

Single-Function Safety Relays MSR127RP MSR127TP MSR126T MSR30RT 3 N.O. 3 N.O. 2 N.O. 1 N.C. 1 N.C. None Removable (Screw) Removable (Screw) Fixed Removable Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Auto./Manual Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual Auto./Manual Monitored Manual 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 24V DC 5-26 5-26 5-24 5-16
440R-N23135 440R-N23132 440R-N23117
440R-N23198
Connection Systems
8-Pin Micro (M12) Description Cordset Patchcord Distribution Box Shorting Plug T-Port
2 N.C. & 1 N.O. 889D-F8AB-1 889D-F8ABDM

R
3-99
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
1-
Description
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Reset Type
Power Supply
Cat. Page No.
Cat. No.
General
M20 Conduit
Connector
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches
Rotacam
3.5 (0.14) 14.5 (0.57) 6.5 (0.26) 99 (3.9) 23.5 (0.93) 6.5 (0.26) 38 (1.5)
24 (0.94)
36 (1.42)
52 (2.05)
65 (2.56)
M5 Tapped
"A"
M4
15.5 (0.61)
# = mm (in)
L Rotacam HS-2 Rotacam P85 30mm (1.18) 85mm (3.35)
D 16mm (0.63) 12.7mm (0.5)
"A" 25 (0.98)
3.2mm (0.13) 5 (0.2)
2 x M4 (Rotacam HS-2) 13 (0.51) 8 (0.31)
9.5 (0.37)
Note: Holes only on pre-bored models. Note: 2D, 3D and electrical drawings are available on www.ab.com.
3-100
6.5 (0.26)
M4
86 (3.39)
M5 Tapped
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches
Rotacam
Description 2 N.C. & 1 N.O.
11 21 33
12 22 34
5
Contact Action
Open
Closed
Safety A Safety B Aux A 6
4-Aux A 5-Safety B White Blue Safety A Safety B Aux A Ground Not Connected 7-Safety A 6-Safety B
Grey Pink Green Yellow Red Brown

R
3-101
Power
Logic
Operator Interface
2-Opto-electronics
8-Pin Micro (M12) Pin 2 Not Connected
3-Aux A 8-Ground
2-N/A 1-Safety A
1-
0mm
General
Safety Switches

Overview
General Principles
9CNC precision cut keys
Interlocking and Control Solutions Trapped Key InterlocksWhy Use Them?

Based upon the premise that no one key can be in two places at once, key interlock systems can be configured to provide that a predetermined sequence of events takes place or that hazards have been reduced before operators can become exposed to them. It is a mechanical system and is therefore widely used in applications including those where the location of plant, environment or explosive atmospheres make the use of electrical interlock systems unsuitable or expensive to install. In addition, unique coding can be provided, leading to a greater degree of security and tamper-resistance.
CE MarkingTested and Approved

Only Prosafe products carry the prestigious BG mark. A sign of safety, independently tested by the German Berufsgenossenschaftliches Institut fr Arbeitssicherheit, "BIA." Additional tests for valve interlocks include Lloyds Certificate for fire test and salt-mist resistance.
Over 100,000 Operations

Prosafe products have been subjected to independent, exhaustive testing. With only a small amount of lubricant added infrequently, keys were inserted, rotated and removed at a rate of 12 times per minute. After 100,000 operations (at 10 operations a day this is equivalent to 27 years) the unit was functioning satisfactorily and most importantly would "pass" only the original or equivalent new key. No incorrect keys could operate the lock, underlining the unit's integrity as well as longevity.
3-Trapped Key Switches 11-Cat. No. Index Logic Power
Why Prosafe?
In order to derive the full benefits from a trapped key interlocking system its components must be totally practical, easily maintainable and readily available. Prosafe's unique key and code barrel gives the ability for even complicated interlocking systems and spare parts to be ordered from our worldwide network of distributorsfast! A first for trapped key interlocks.
Five Unique Prosafe Benefits

Compare the following to other trapped key manufacturers: 1. All stainless interlocking and coded partsincluding the code barrel and internal components at no extra cost. 2. Weather cap as standardno extra charge for dust caps and seals. 3. Standard red color-coded key and ID tagsat no extra charge. 4. Custom color/text keys and ID tagsnominal extra charge. 5. A complete range of isolators, key exchange, miniature valve interlocks and gate interlocksall using the same key principle.
The Prosafe Advantage
Stainless steel construction.
3-102
Safety Switches

Overview
The Advantage
Weather cap supplied as standard with color coded tagging.
Code barrels: Factory assembled to ensure safety integrity. Internal components are captive within the code barrel.
Rugged and reliable push-pull operation no springs or cams to fail.
Tamper-resistant screws
All stainless steel construction
Prosafe Keys
Compact, solid and sturdy keys supplied with dust seals and coded tagging. Optional colors/text are available.

R
3-103
Power
Logic
11-Cat. No. Index
3-Trapped Key Switches
9-
Principles
General
Safety Switches

Overview
Design Suggestions for an Interlocking System Plant and Machinery Interlocking
Primary hazards (Power isolation) Auxiliary hazards Key control element Guarded area access Ancillary functions
General Principles
9-
Bolt lock for sliding guards A A B A B C C C D
Rotary key switch
Timed delay unit
Solenoid key release unit coupled to temperature or pressure switch sensors Required when more than one hazard element needs isolation or more than one exposure/access point interlocking. Comments Consider sequentially interlocking all primary sources of hazard so all are eliminated. In turn, releasing a single key to input in key control element. Additional monitoring, isolation or control functions such as switches or solenoid locks may be incorporated at this stage to eliminate other elements.
C Access lock for general duty sliding, hinge and lift off guards
Rotary key switch
D 3 Port spool valve
3 Port spool valve B
Bolt lock off device for grounding and capacitive discharge
C Chain interlock for large or poorly aligned sliding, hinge and lift off guards To gain access to the danger zone. C D
Consider removal of all power providing kinetic energy to the system i.e., electrical motors, pressurized air, etc. Comments Consider factors such as run down and environmental factors such as hazardous (explosive) atmospheres. Use EEX isolator and timed delay units where necessary.
Consider if the hazard is removed immediately i.e., a) Machine run on due to momentum. b) Pressurization of hydraulic or pneumatic systems. c) Stored energy such as capacitance or static electricity. d) Temperature, either hot or cold, creating a hazard.
Comments Consider 2 key versions to provide a) Personnel key exchange types to prevent operator lock-in (whole body access applications only). b) Lock out devices requiring 2 keys in from different sources to enable controlled access.
Required when additional functions such as programming/machine resetting are necessary. Comments Two key versions required at access points to facilitate this feature.
3-104
Safety Switches

Overview
Illustrated Principles of Trapped Key Interlocking
Sequence of Operation
1. The ETU isolator has two keys. One is a nonremovable key. The other key (a "AA" coded key) can be removed after a timed duration, which is set by a potentiometer inside the ETU isolator. Turn the nonremovable key to turn the hazardous machine motion off and start the timer. When the time expires, the Key Free LED turns ON. Remove the "AA" key. 2. Insert the "AA" key into the Key Exchange Unit (KEX) and turn it 90. 3. Turn one of the "AB" keys 90 and remove it from the KEX. This traps the "AA" key in the KEX and prevents the restarting of the machine. 4. Insert the "AB" key into the Single-key Bolt Lock (SBL) and turn it 90 to gain partial body access to the machine. 5. Turn the second "AB" key 90 and remove it from the KEX. Removal of this key also traps the "A" key in the KEX and prevents the restarting of the machine. 6. Insert the "AB" key into the Dual-key Access Lock (DAL) and turn it 90. 7. Turn the "AC" key 90 and remove the "C" key. Rotate the access handle to allow full body entry into the hazard zone. 8. Take the "AC" key into the hazard zone, insert it into the rotary key switch (RKSE) and turn it 90 to send a signal to the machine control system, to allow the machine to operate in a slow or teach mode. 9. Reverse the process to return the machine to full operational mode.
Bill of Materials
Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description Single Key Time Delayed with an AA Primary Key Key Exchange Unit, AB Primary Key, Two B Secondary Keys Trapped (included) Single Bolt Lock, AB Primary Key Dual Access Lock, AB Primary Key, C Secondary Key Trapped (included) Rotary Key Switch, AC Primary Code Barrel AA Key Cat. No. 440T-MSTUE11AA 440T-MKEXE11AAABAB 440T-MSBLE10AB 440T-MDALE10ABAC 440T-MRKSE10AC 440T-AKEYE10AA
Note: Primary keys must be ordered separately, when not provided for by a previous sequential trapped key. In the example above, only one primary key must be ordered separately. The remaining primary keys are provided by a previous sequential secondary (trapped) key.

R
3-105
Power
Logic
11-Cat. No. Index
9-
Principles
AA ETU Isolator with timed delay key release
AA AB AB KEX Trapped key AA Locking off ETU, Release access door lock, key AB.
AB SBL AB key in to retract bolt from guard door.
AB AC DAL AB key in then AC key out to open guard door.
AC RKS To energize robot teach mode.
General
Safety Switches

Overview
Code Selection
Ordering Prosafe trapped key products requires codes to be included in the cat. no.
General Principles
9-
The codes are added to the end of the cat. no. Each code must be two characters in length. The first code(s) is the primary code and the last code(s), if necessary, are the secondary code(s). Primary codes do not include the key. The key must be ordered separately or must come from a previous operation. Secondary codes come complete with a key, as the key is trapped in the code barrel. Use the tables on page 3-107 to select and track codes.
Ordering Example 1
440T
DALE
10
*
Two character Secondary code (Key included) Two character Primary Code (Key not included)
Product Feature Product Type (Dual-key Access Lock) M = Machine Interlock A = Accessory Bulletin Number (T = Trapped Key)
Order Cat. No. 440TMDALE100AAAB to get a Dual key Access Lock with an "AA" primary code and a "AB" secondary code, with a "AB" key included.
Ordering Example 2
440T
KEXE
16
* *
Two character Secondary code (Key included) Two character Secondary code (Key included) Two character Secondary code (Key included) Two character Primary Code (Key not included) Two character Primary Code (Key not included)
Product Feature Product Type (Dual-key Access Lock) M = Machine Interlock A = Accessory Bulletin Number (T = Trapped Key)
Order Cat. No. 440TMKEXE16AAABACACAC to get a key exchange unit with "AA" and "AB" primary codes and three "AC" secondary codes. The "AA" and "AB" keys are not included. The three "AC" keys, which are trapped in the secondary code barrels, are included.
3-106
Safety Switches

Overview
Key Coding
Below is an example reference guide that is useful in selecting and tracking codes. Start down the Aa column as the lower codes (typically Aa to Za) are stocked. The chart continues on to Zz. Note that there are only 24 letters usedO & Q are not used. Codes are ordered with upper case letters. Labels with two letter codes will show the first letter in the upper case and the second letter in lower case.
Code Aa Ba Ca Da Ea Fa Ga Ha Ia Ja Ka La Ma Na Pa Ra Sa Ta Ua Va Wa Xa Ya Za
Application & Date
Code Ab Bb Cb Db Eb Fb Gb Hb Ib Jb Kb Lb Mb Nb Pb Rb Sb Tb Ub Vb Wb Xb Yb Zb
Application & Date
Code Ac Bc Cc Dc Ec Fc Gc Hc Ic Jc Kc Lc Mc Nc Pc Rc Sc Tc Uc Vc Wc Xc Yc Zc
Application & Date
Code Ad Bd Cd Dd Ed Fd Gd Hd Id Jd Kd Ld Md Nd Pd Rd Sd Td Ud Vd Wd Xd Yd Zd
Application & Date
Code Ae Be Ce De Ee Fe Ge He Ie Je Ke Le Me Ne Pe Re Se Te Ue Ve We Xe Ye Ze
Application & Date
Code Af Bf Df Ef Ff Gf Hf Jf Kf Lf Mf Nf Pf Rf Sf Tf Vf Wf Xf Yf Zf Uf If Cf
Application & Date

R
3-107
Power
Logic
11-Cat. No. Index
9-
Principles
General
Safety Switches
Rotary Switches
Specifications (continued)
10, 11, RPSE 12, 13, 20: RKSE Electrical Life Climatic Test Ambient Temperature, Operation (Ui) Rated Insulation Voltage (Uimp) Rated Impulse withstand Voltage 10, 11, 12, 13: 500 (1.1) 14, 16: 850 (1.9) 14, 16: 1000 (2.2) 1250 (2.8)
General Principles
9Description
The rotary switches are used for electrical isolation of machinery to improve safe access and also as teach boxes in robot cells. Once the power has been turned off, the key can then be withdrawn and used in the next sequence of operation such as unlocking an access hatch or allowing valves to be operated. The rotary switch can either be mounted in a panel or purchased in an enclosure. The rotary switch is available with 4 poles, either 4 N.O. or 2 N.C. and 2 N.O. The 100 A 4 N.O. switch has 3 contacts rated at 100 A and 1 contact rated at 20 A.
Weight [g (lbs)]
100,000 operations Constant to DIN IEC 68 Part 2-3 Variable to DIN IEC 68 Part 2-30 Encased -2540 C (10104 F) 690V 6 kV
S3 Intermittent Rating Duty Factor 60/40/25% = 1, 3/1, 6/2 xlu (VDE 0530, Part 1) Last two digits of Cat. No. (See Product Selection table) Rated Uninterrupted Current (Iu) 10 11 16 12 32A 30A 690V 600V 750V 32A 32A 5.5 kW 11 kW 11 kW 4 kW 7.5 kW 7.5 kW 2 HP 5 HP 10 HP 10 HP 330A 330A 220A 35 A, max. 15 kA 13 63A 60A 690V 600V 750V 63A 63A 15 kW 22 kW 22 kW 11 kW 18.5 kW 18.5 kW 5 HP 15 HP 30 HP 40 HP 500A 500A 270A 14 100A 100A 1000V 600V 1000V 100A 100A 22 kW 37 kW 37 kW 22 kW 30 kW 30 kW 10 HP 25 HP 30 HP 30 HP 600A 600A 300A
IEC/EN/VDE 20A UL/CSA 16A IEC/EN/VDE 690V
Rated Operational Voltage (Ue)
UL/CSA 600V Main Switch Isolation 750V Voltage, Max. AC-21A 20A IEC/EN/VDE AC-1 SEV 20A 3-phase 4 kW 220240V 3-pole 7.5 kW 380440V 500690V 7.5 kW 3-phase 3 kW 220240V 3-pole 5.5 kW 380440V 500690V 5.5 kW 3-phase 140V 1 HP
Features
316L stainless steel keys Direct drive operationpositively opens contacts Stainless steel dust cap included Up to 400 A isolation 4 N.O., 2 N.O. and 2 N.C., 3 N.O./1 N.C., 3 N.O., or 3 N.C. and neutral contacts Replaceable code barrel assembly
Rated Operational Current (Ie) Rated Operational Power at 50/60 Hz (AC-23A IEC/EN/VDE)
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards Category Certifications Operating Characteristics Conduit Entry Mechanical Life Finger Protection Environmental Characteristics Operating Temperature [C (F)] Relative Humidity Physical Characteristics Shear Force to Key Torque to Key 15.1 kN (3398 lbs), max. 14 Nm (124 lbin), max. -10+40 (14104 ) 95% 4 x M20 (RKS only) 100,000 operations DIN 57106/VDE 0106 T.100 EN1088, IEC/EN60204-1, IEC/EN609475-1, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, GS-ET19, AS4024.1, UL508, CSA 22.2 Cat. 1 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1) Suitable for Cat. 2, 3, and 4 systems CE Marked for all applicable directives, BG, cULus on contact block; C-Tick not required
Rated Operational Power at 50/60 Hz (AC-3A IEC/EN/VDE)
DOL Rating (UL/CSA)
3-pole 240V 2 HP 480V 5 HP 600V 5 HP AC-23/AC-3 250A 220240V
Rated Breaking Capacity
Motor Switch 250A 380440V 500690V 150A 25 A, max. 15 kA 110 0.75 6
Fuse Rating (GI) Rated Fuse Short Circuit Current Terminal Cross Section
63/50 A, 100 A, max. max. 15/20 kA 25 kA 416 2.510 6 AWG 2.53.5 1.52.5 2 AWG
mm2 single/multiple wire (stranded) with sleeve 8 AWG
Conductor Size, mm2 minmax
3-108
Safety Switches
Rotary Switches
Product Selection
Type Contact Type 4 N.O. 2 N.O. & 2 N.C. 4 N.O. 4 N.O. 3 N.O. & 1 N.O. Enclosure Mounted (RKS only) Mild Steel Enclosure Mounted (RKS only) 8 N.O. 3 N.O. + Neutral 3 N.O. 4 N.O. 2 N.O. & 2 N.C. 4 N.O. 4 N.O. 3 N.O. & 1 N.O. 8 N.O. 3 N.O. & 3 N.C. Panel Mounted 4 N.O. Current Accuracy 20 A 20 A 32 A 63 A 3 N.O. 100 A and 1 N.O. 20 A 20 A 200 A 400 A 20 A 20 A 32 A 63 A 3 N.O. 100 A and 1 N.O. 20 A 20 A 20 A 40 A Cat. No. 440T-MRKSE111 440T-MRKSE121 440T-MRKSE131 440T-MRKSE141 440T-MRKSE161 440T-MRKSE211 440T-MRPSE101 440T-MRPSE111 440T-MRPSE121 440T-MRPSE131 440T-MRPSE141 440T-MRPSE161 440T-MRPSE181 440T-MRPSE201 440T-MRKSE221
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 3-107.
Type Isolator on First Key Out
Number of Keys
Contact Type 4 N.O.
Current Accuracy 20 A 20 A 32 A 63 A 20 A 20 A 32 A 63 A 20 A 20 A 32 A 63 A 20 A 20 A 32 A 63 A 20 A 20 A 32 A 63 A 20 A 20 A 32 A 63 A
Cat. No. 440T-MMRSE1011 440T-MMRSE1111 440T-MMRSE1211 440T-MMRSE20111 440T-MMRSE21111 440T-MMRSE22111 440T-MMRSE23111 440T-MMRSE301111 440T-MMRSE311111 440T-MMRSE321111 440T-MMRSE331111 440T-MMRXE101 440T-MMRXE111 440T-MMRXE121 440T-MMRXE131 440T-MMRXE201 440T-MMRXE211 440T-MMRXE221 440T-MMRXE231 440T-MMRXE301 440T-MMRXE311 440T-MMRXE331 440T-MMRXE321 440T-MMRSE1311
Dual key isolator
2 keys out
2 N.O. & 2 N.C. 4 N.O. 4 N.O. 4 N.O. 2 N.O. & 2 N.C. 4 N.O. 4 N.O. 4 N.O. 2 N.O. & 2 N.C. 4 N.O. 4 N.O. 4 N.O. 2 N.O. & 2 N.C. 4 N.O. 4 N.O. 4 N.O. 2 N.O. & 2 N.C. 4 N.O. 4 N.O. 4 N.O. 2 N.O. & 2 N.C. 4 N.O. 4 N.O.
Triple key isolator
3 keys out
Quad key isolator
4 keys out
Dual key exchange isolator
1 key in/ 1 key out
Triple key exchange isolator
1 key in/ 2 key out
Quad key exchange isolator
1 key in/ 3 key out
Substitute the desired secondary code for this symbol (key included). See page 3-107.

R
3-109
Power
Logic
11-Cat. No. Index
9-
Principles
General
440T-MRKSE101
Safety Switches
Rotary Switches
Accessories
Description Stainless steel key Stainless steel replacement code barrel for products other than 100 A RPS/RKS units with dust cap Stainless steel replacement code barrel for 100 A unit rotary switch Stainless steel weatherproof replacement dust cap Cable grip, M20 conduit, accommodates cable diameter 710.5 mm (0.270.41 in.) Adaptor, conduit, M20 to 1/2 inch NPT, plastic Supplemental Contact Block, 20 A, 1 N.O. Late Make, Early Break 1 N.C. Auxiliary Supplemental Contact Block, 20 A, 2 N.O. Late Make, Early Break Supplemental Contact Block, 20 A, 1 N.O., 1 N.C. Supplemental Contact Block, 20 A, 2 N.O. ABS plastic enclosure Stainless steel enclosure (240x180x150 mm) Stainless steel enclosure (150x150x80 mm) ABS plastic enclosure Stainless steel enclosure For use with RPSE12, RPSE20 (maximum 1 per switch) For use with RPSE12, RPSE20 (maximum 1 per switch) For use with RPSE13 & 14 For use with RPSE13 & 14 For use with dual key, and dual key exchange, isolators For use with >20 A RPSE units (not including RPSE21 or 22) For use with RPSE10 & 11 For use with triple/quad key, and triple/quad key exchange, isolators For use with triple/quad key, and triple/quad key exchange, isolators 3-53 3-140 Additional Information Cat. No. 440T-AKEYE101 440T-ASCBE141 440T-ASCBE111 440T-ASFC101 440A-A09028 440A-A09042 440T-AACA10 440T-AACA11 440T-AACA20 440T-AACA21 440T-AIPB10 440T-AIPB25 440T-AIPB26 440T-AIPB50 440T-AIPB55
175 (6.88)
60 (2.36)
Assembly Adaptor Plate

60 (2.36)
4 M20 KNOCKOUTS (2 PER END)
23 (0.9) 60 CRS (2.35)
46 (1.81) 80 (3.14) 88.4 (3.48)
4 FIXINGS 4.5 (0.17)
Cover Code Barrel
24 (0.94)
61 CRS (2.4)
View On A
VIEW OF BASE FIXINGS
4 Off 20 mm (0.78) Knockouts Typical Position 2 Off Top and 2 Off Bottom
MMRSE10
100 (3.94)
MOUNTING HOLES 4.2 (0.17)
MMRSE20
130 (5.12) CRS
1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8
ISOLATOR 4 N.O. 20 A KEY FREE
130 (5.12) CRS
70 (2.76) CRS
165 (6.49) Mounting Centers
125 CRS (4.92)
General Principles
9-

Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
MRKSE10 and MRKSE11
MRKSE12 and MRKSE13
100 (3.93)
80 (3.14) 85.7 (3.37) 129.2 (4.99)
Coded Key Weather Cap Cover
115 (4.52)
2 Off M4 Mounting Holes 2 Off 20 mm dia. (0.78) Knockouts On Rear Face
39 (1.53)
150 (5.91)
168 158 (6.61) (6.22) CRS

70 (2.76) CRS
144 (5.67) PANEL CUT-OUT
246 (9.69) PANEL CUT-OUT 270 (10.63)

90 (3.54) CRS
90 (3.54) CRS
R4 max.
SIX MOUNTING HOLES 4.5 (0.18)
69 (2.72)
89 (3.5)
KEYS SUPPLIED SEPERATELY
35 (1.38) CRS
PANEL CUTOUT
69 (2.72)
ISOLATOR 4 N.O. 20 A CONTACTS (KEY FREE)
35 (1.38) CRS
82 (3.23)
SIX HOLES 4.5 (0.18)
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
97 (3.82)
3-110
Safety Switches
Rotary Switches
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)] (continued)
2 Off M4 Mounting Holes External
OFF ON
Weather Cap Assembly
80 (3.15)
60 crs
100 (3.98)
160 (6.3) Unit in Off Position Key Removed M25/M32 Conduit Entry Knockouts 2 per end 100 (3.98)
Coded Key Code Barrel Assembly Adaptor Plate 85 (3.35) 163 (6.42)
View on A
4 Off M4 Mounting Holes Internal
18 (0.71) 44 crs
100 (3.98)
4 Off 20 (0.79) Dia. Knockouts Typical Position 2 Off Top & 2 Off Bottom
64 (2.51)
Code Barrel Assembly
70.4 (2.77) 16 (0.62)
96 (3.78) 110.5 (4.35) Unit in On Position Key Trapped
44.4 (1.74) Dia. 58 (2.28) Dia.
Base Mountings M4 Fixings
64 (2.51)
MRPSE 12, 13, 14 and 20

32 (1.26) 16 (0.6) Code Barrel 3 (0.12) max. Panel Thickness 16 (0.6) Switch Unit
Legend Plate 2 Holes 4.0 (0.15) Dia. 20.0 (0.78) Dia. Mounting Screws
34 (1.33)
3 mm max. Panel Thickness

Mounting Block
32.0 (1.25)
Panel Mounting Details
25 (0.98)
Weather Cap Assembly Fixing Screws OFF
Mtg. Block
71.5 (2.8) 55.5 (2.19)
Panel Mounting Details

Switch Unit
25 (0.98)
ON Legend Plate 64 Square Legend Plate Drive Adaptor Panel
43 (1.69)

R
3-111
Power
Logic
11-Cat. No. Index
Hole 20 (0.79)
2 Holes 4.0 (0.15) Dia.
16.0 (0.62)
23 (0.9)
9-
250 (9.8)
240 (9.4)
MRPSE10 and 11
Principles
60 crs
90 crs
General
MRKSE14
MRKSE16
Safety Switches
Rotary Switches
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)] (continued) MMRXE10 and MMRXE11
100 (3.94) MOUNTING HOLES 4.2 (0.17)
General
150 (5.91)
ISOLATOR MRXE10 - 4 N.O. 20 A MRXE11 - 2 N.O./2 N.C. 20 A
70 (2.76)
A
Principles
9168 158 (6.61) (6.22)
PRIMARY
SECONDARY
B
70 (2.76)
MADE IN GBR
87 (3.43) 90 (3.54)
MMRXE30
270 (10.63) 130 (5.12) 130 (5.12) 95 (3.74)
MRKSE22
450 (17.72)
280 (11.02)
63 (2.48)
600 (23.62)
56 56 (2.2)
SIX MOUNTING HOLES 4.5 (0.18)
56 (2.2)
56 (2.2)
PAINTED STEEL CABINET
SECONDARY SECONDARY SECONDARY KEY #1 KEY #2 KEY #3
PRIMARY KEY
ISOLATOR HANDLE
SINGLE KEY BOLTLOCK
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
ISOLATOR ON FIRST SECONDARY KEY
3-112
Safety Switches
Rotary Switches
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)] (continued) MRPSE16
32 (1.26) 16 (0.6) Code Barrel
16 (0.6)
Hole 20 (0.79) Panel Mounting Details
2 Holes 4.0 (0.15) Dia.
23 (0.9)
46 (1.8) Dia.
Weather Cap Assembly Fixing Screws OFF
25 (0.98)
Switch Unit Mounting. Block
Legend Plate
Drive Adaptor Panel
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8 MRKSE11 and MRPSE11 MMRSE11 and MMRXE11 MMRSE21 and MMRXE21 MMRSE31 and MMRXE31
1 3 5 7
2 (100A) 4 (100A) 6 (100A) 8 (20A)
1 3 5 7 9 11
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
MRKSE10 and MRPSE10 MRKSE12 and MRPSE12 MRKSE13 and MRPSE13 ----------- and MRPSE20 MMRSE10 and MMRXE10 MMRSE12 and MMRXE12 MMRSE13 and MMRXE13 MMRSE20 and MMRXE20 MMRSE22 and MMRXE22 MMRSE23 and MMRXE23 MMRSE30 and MMRXE30 MMRSE32 and MMRXE32 MMRSE33 and MMRXE33
MRKSE14 and MRPSE14
1 3 5 7 9 11
2 4 6 8 10 12
13 15
MRKSE16 and MRPSE16
MRKSE18 and MRPSE18

R
3-113
Power
Logic
11-Cat. No. Index
Typical Wiring Diagrams Shown with Key Free
9-
ON
Principles
General
3 (0.12) max. Panel Thickness
Safety Switches
Solenoid Release Units

Specifications
Safety Ratings EN1954-1, IEC/EN60204-1,EN1088, IEC/EN60947-5-1, ISO13849-1, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, GS-ET-19, AS4024.1 CE Marked for all applicable directives and BG 24V DC, 110V AC, 230V AC DC Types: 6.5 W continuous AC Types: 6V A continuous 100,000 operations 100,000 operations See rotary power switches. 15.1 kN (3398 lbs), max. 14 Nm (124 lbin), max. Trapped Key Components: 316L stainless steel Steel Face Plate: 316L stainless steel Optional Box: ABS plastic 040 (32104 ) 95%
General Principles
9Description
The solenoid release unit is used for electrical isolation of machinery to improve safe access. It consists of a rotary power switch and a solenoid. The trapped key can be removed once an external signal is given to its internal solenoid locking mechanism. An indicator light on the solenoid release unit indicates when the trapped key can be removed; that is, when power is applied to the solenoid. The solenoid signal only needs to be present when key removal is necessary. The solenoid is rated for 100% duty cycle. Power to the solenoid can be removed after the trapped key is removed. Rotating the trapped key causes the isolating power switch to change state; the normally open contacts open and the normally closed contacts (if applicable) will close. The trapped key can then be used in the next sequence of the operation.
Standards
Certifications Operating Characteristics Solenoid Voltage Solenoid Power Electrical Life Mechanical Life Utilization Category Electrical Characteristics Shear Force to Key Torque to Key Material Operating Temperature [C (F)] Relative Humidity
Environmental & Physical Characteristics
Features
Direct drive operationpositively opens contacts Integral solenoid monitoring Key trapped until release signal is applied LED or NEON "key free" indication 316L stainless steel construction 24V DC, 110V AC or 230V AC solenoid options Weatherproof stainless steel dust cap as standard UL and CSA Approval on switches Single or multiple key units available (contact factory) Replaceable code barrel assembly
3-114
Safety Switches

Product Selection
Type Solenoid Voltage Contacts 2 N.O. & 2 N.C. 24V DC 4 N.O. 3 N.O. & 3 N.C. 2 N.O. & 2 N.C. 110V AC Single key out 4 N.O. 3 N.O. & 3 N.C. 4 N.O. 2 N.O. & 2 N.C. 230V AC 4 N.O. 2 N.O. & 2 N.C. 110V DC 4 N.O. 3 N.O. & 3 N.C. 4 N.O. Dual key out 24V DC 2 N.O. & 2 N.C. 4 N.O. 4 N.O. Triple key out 24V DC 2 N.O. & 2 N.C. 4 N.O. 4 N.O. Quad key out 24V DC 2 N.O. & 2 N.C. 4 N.O.
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107.
Current, Nom 20 A 32 A 20 A 20 A 32 A 20 A 63 A 20 A 32 A 63 A 20 A
Cat. No. 440T-MSRUE101 440T-MSRUE121 440T-MSRUE131 440T-MSRUE221 440T-MSRUE201 440T-MSRUE231 440T-MSRUE141 440T-MSRUE331 440T-MSRUE301 440T-MSRUE341 440T-MSRUE351 440T-MSRUE441 440T-MSRUE401 440T-MSRUE461 440T-MS2097D11 440T-MS2097A11 440T-MS2097G11 440T-MS3417D111 440T-MS3417A111 440T-MS3417G111 440T-MS3417J111 440T-MS3418D1111 440T-MS3418A1111 440T-MS3418G1111 440T-MS3418J1111 440T-MSRUE241
20 A 32 A 63 A 20 A 32 A 63 A 20 A 32 A 63 A
Accessories
Description Stainless steel key Stainless steel replacement code barrel with dust cap Stainless steel weatherproof replacement dust cap Optional plastic enclosure Optional ABS plastic enclosure Optional stainless steel enclosure
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107.
Additional Information 3-140 For use with single key out 20 A units For use with single key out 32 A units For use with triple/quad key out units For use with triple/quad key out units
Cat. No. 440T-AKEYE101 440T-ASFC101 440T-AIPB10 440T-AIPB22 440T-AIPB50 440T-AIPB55

R
3-115
Power
Logic
11-Cat. No. Index
440T-ASCBE141
9-
440T-MS2097J11
Principles
General
440T-MSRUE111
Safety Switches

MSRUE13
100 (3.94) 90 (3.54)
MS2097
270 (10.63) 130 (5.12) 130 (5.12)
General Principles
9-
70 (2.76)
24V DC SOLENOID (11 W)
168 (6.61)
158 (6.22) 144 (5.67) CUTOUT
150 (5.91)
63 (2.5) 246 (9.69) CUTOUT
70 (2.76)
KEY#1 KEY#2
97 (3.82) 90 (3.54) CRS 35 (1.38) CRS 35 (1.38) CRS R4 max. 66 (2.6) 82 (3.23)
6 HOLES 4.2 (0.17)
69 (2.72)
ISOLATOR CONTACTS 3 N.O./3 N.C. 20 A (KEY FREE)
SOLENOID
SOLENOID MONITOR SWITCHES (KEY TRAPPED)

95 (3.74)
24V DC SOLENOID LOCKING KEY #1
1 2 4 6 7 8
SOLENOID
1 3 5 PANEL CUTOUT 7 9 11 SIX HOLES 4.5 (0.18)
2 4 6 8 10 12
24V DC INPUT
ISOLATOR 4 N.O. 20 A
3 5
24V DC INPUT
MSRUE35
100 (3.94) 90 (3.54)
MS3417
270 (10.63) 130 (5.12) 130 (5.12)
230V AC SOLENOID
70 (2.76)
230V AC SOLENOID (17VA)
168 (6.61)
158 (6.22)
150 (5.91)
70 (2.76)
ISOLATOR AND SOLENOID ON FIRST KEY
4 N.O. 32 A ISOLATOR
92 (3.62) 90 (3.54) CRS 35 (1.38) CRS R4 max. 66 (2.6) 35 35 (1.38) CRS CRS 82 (3.23)
6 HOLES 4.2 (0.17)
ISOLATOR CONTACTS 4 N.O. 63 A (KEY FREE)

1 3 2 4 6 8
230V AC INPUT
PANEL CUTOUT
5 7
SIX HOLES 4.5 (0.18)
SOLENOID
Typical Wiring
MC MC Gnd
3-116
Safety Switches
Electronic Timed-Delay Units

Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards Category Certifications Operating Characteristics Electrical Life Mechanical Life Solenoid Voltage Time Delay Operating Temperature [C (F)] Relative Humidity Shear Force to Key Torque to Key 100,000 operations 100,000 operations 0.1 s30 min 040 (32104 ) 95% 15.1 kN (3398 lbs), max. 14 Nm (124 lbin), max. Trapped key components: 316L stainless steel Face plate: 316L stainless steel Optional box: ABS plastic or stainless steel 24V DC, 110V AC, and 230V AC
Cat. 1 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1) CE Marked for all applicable directives and BG
Description
The Electronic Timed-delay Unit (ETU) is used in applications that require an elapsed time to occur before allowing access to a hazardous area. The ETU uses an CU1 control unit timer to execute the timing sequence. Turning a nonremovable key initiates the timer. When the CU1 times out, its output energizes an internal solenoid, which then allows the removal of either one or two trapped keys. The Single-key Timed delay Unit (STU) has one trapped key. After the CU1 preset time has expired, the single trapped key can be removed and used to continue the next sequence in allowing access to the hazard. The single key must be returned to the STU and trapped to allow the nonremovable key to re-initiate the hazard. The Dual-key Timed delay Unit (DTU) has two trapped keys. After the CU1 preset time has expired, both keys can be removed and used to continue the next sequences in allowing access to the hazard. Both keys must be returned to the DTU and trapped to allow the nonremovable key re-initiate the hazard.
Material
Features
Timed-delay output up to 40 minutes Single key or dual key 316L stainless steel keys Category 1 Stop Replaceable code barrel assembly

R
3-117
Power
Logic
11-Cat. No. Index
9-
Principles
General
IEC/EN60204-1,EN1088, IEC/EN609475-1, ISO13849-1, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, GS-ET-19, AS4024.1
Safety Switches
Electronic Timed-Delay Units

Product Selection
Type Solenoid Voltage 24V DC Single key out Panel mounted 110V AC 230V AC 24V DC Dual key out Panel mounted 110V AC 230V AC Contact Set 1 3 N.O. 40 A 2 N.O. 20 A 3 N.O. 40 A 2 N.O. 20 A 3 N.O. 40 A 2 N.O. 20 A 3 N.O. 40 A 2 N.O. 20 A 3 N.O. 40 A 2 N.O. 20 A 3 N.O. 40 A 2 N.O. 20 A Contact Set 2 1 N.O. 20 A 1 N.C. 20 A 1 N.O. 20 A 1 N.C. 20 A 1 N.O. 20 A 1 N.C. 20 A 1 N.O. 20 A 1 N.C. 20 A 1 N.O. 20 A 1 N.C. 20 A 1 N.O. 20 A 1 N.C. 20 A Cat. No. 440T-MSTUE101 440T-MSTUE111 440T-MSTUE201 440T-MSTUE221 440T-MSTUE301 440T-MSTUE331 440T-MDTUE1011 440T-MDTUE1111 440T-MDTUE2011 440T-MDTUE2211 440T-MDTUE3011 440T-MDTUE3311
160 (6.30) 150 (5.91) 70 (2.76) 70 (2.76)
230 (9.06)
General Principles
9-
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107 for code selection.
Accessories
Description Stainless steel key Stainless steel replacement code barrel with dust cap Stainless steel weatherproof replacement dust cap Optional plastic enclosure Optional stainless steel enclosure For use with 20 A units For use with 40 A units For use with all units 3-140 Additional Information Cat. No. 440T-AKEYE101 440T-ASCBE141 440T-ASFC101 440T-AIPB20 440T-AIPB23 440T-AIPB46

250 (9.84) 226 (8.90) 216 (8.50) 118 (4.65) Optional ABS Box (440T-AIPB20) for 20 Amp Isolator One Key for STU (key not included) Nonremovable Key Two Keys for DTU (keys not included) 98 (3.86) 300 (11.81) 8 Holes 4.6 (0.18) Dia. 95 (3.74) 110 (4.33) 90 (3.54)
Optional ABS Box (440T-AIPB23) for 40 Amp Isolator
3-118
Safety Switches
Stopped Motion Units

Specifications
Safety Ratings
Standards Category Certifications
Cat. 3 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1) CE Marked for all applicable directives and BG 100,000 operations 100,000 operations 24V DC, 110V AC, and 230V AC 0.1 s40 min 2x inductive sensors 040 (32104) 95% 15.1 kN (3398 lbs) 14 Nm (124 lbin) Trapped key components: 316L stainless steel Face plate: 316L stainless steel Optional box: ABS plastic or stainless steel Inductive sensors: stainless steel barrel, plastic face Tamper resistant screws 2.0 kg (4.4 lbs)
Description
The Stopped Motion Unit (SMU) is used in applications that require the detection of stopped motion of mechanical parts of a machine. The SMU uses inductive proximity sensors to detect motion and the CU2 control unit to monitor the sensors. The CU2 requires a PNP and an NPN output type proximity sensors. When the proximity sensors stop detecting movement, the CU2 activates its output, powering an internal solenoid. With the solenoid energized, one or two trapped keys can be removed from the SMU. The removable trapped keys (one or two) can be used to continue the next sequence in allowing access to the hazardous area. See the CU2 control unit for details on setting the delay time. Additional proximity sensors can be found in the Sensors catalog.
Operating Characteristics Electrical Life Mechanical Life Solenoid Voltage Time Delay Zero Speed Sensors Operating Temperature [C (F)] Relative Humidity Shear Force to Key Torque to Key
Features
Stopped motion detection NPN and PNP proximity sensors Timed-delay output up to 40 minutes Category 1 Stop Replaceable code barrel assembly
Mounting Weight

R
3-119
Power
Logic
11-Cat. No. Index
9-
Material
Principles
General
EN1954-1, IEC/EN60204-1, EN1088, IEC/EN60947-5-1, ISO13849-1, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, GS-ET-19, AS4024.1
Safety Switches
Stopped Motion Units

Product Selection
Type Solenoid Voltage 24V DC Single key out Panel mounted 110V AC 230V AC 24V DC Dual key out Panel mounted 110V AC 230V AC Contact Set 1 3 N.O. 40 A 2 N.O. 20 A 3 N.O. 40 A 2 N.O. 20 A 3 N.O. 40 A 2 N.O. 20 A 3 N.O. 40 A 2 N.O. 20 A 3 N.O. 40 A 2 N.O. 20 A 3 N.O. 40 A 2 N.O. 20 A Contact Set 2 1 N.O. 20 A 1 N.C. 20 A 1 N.O. 20 A 1 N.C. 20 A 1 N.O. 20 A 1 N.C. 20 A 1 N.O. 20 A 1 N.C. 20 A 1 N.O. 20 A 1 N.C. 20 A 1 N.O. 20 A 1 N.C. 20 A Cat. No. 440T-MSMSE101 440T-MSMSE111 440T-MSMSE201 440T-MSMSE221 440T-MSMSE301 440T-MSMSE331 440T-MDMSE1011 440T-MDMSE1111 440T-MDMSE2011 440T-MDMSE2211 440T-MDMSE3011 440T-MDMSE3311
160 (6.30) 150 (5.91) 70 (2.76) 70 (2.76)
230 (9.06)
General Principles
9-
Accessories
Description Stainless steel key Stainless steel replacement code barrel with dust cap Stainless steel weatherproof replacement dust cap 500 mA fuseBussmann Cat. No. ETF-500 mA Optional plastic enclosure Optional stainless steel enclosure 12 Inductive Proximity Sensor, Three-wire, DC 18 30 NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP page 5-57 500 mA @ 250V NA For use with 20 A units For use with 40 A units For use with all units 440R-A31562 440T-AIPB20 440T-AIPB23 440T-AIPB46 872C-D3NN12-E2 872C-D3NP12-E2 872C-D5NN18-E2 872C-D5NP18-E2 872C-D10NN30-E2
872C-D10NP30-E2
Size [mm]
Type
Additional Information
Cat. No. 440T-AKEYE101
3-140
440T-ASCBE141 440T-ASFC101

250 (9.84) 226 (8.90) 216 (8.50) 118 (4.65) Optional ABS Box (440T-AIPB20) for 20 Amp Isolator One Key for STU (key not included) Nonremovable Key Two Keys for DTU (keys not included) 98 (3.86) 300 (11.81) 8 Holes 4.6 (0.18) Dia. 95 (3.74) 110 (4.33) 90 (3.54)
Optional ABS Box (440T-AIPB23) for 40 Amp Isolator
3-120
Safety Switches
Exchange Units
Specifications
Safety Ratings
Category Certifications Operating Characteristics Operating Temperature [C (F)] Mechanical Life Shear Force to Key Torque to Key
Cat. 3 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1) cULus and TV CE Marked for all applicable directives and BG; C-Tick not required -40+200 (-40+392 ) 100,000 operations 15.1 kN (3398 lbs), max. 14 Nm (124 lbin), max. 95% 316L stainless steel
Description
The key exchange unit (KEX) is used in an interlocking sequence to link together other devices in the Prosafe range and caters to more complex operating sequences. The operating principle is such that no secondary keys can be removed from the unit until all primary keys have been inserted, rotated, and trapped. The primary keys remain trapped until all secondary keys have been re-inserted, rotated, and trapped. It is typically used in applications where there is more than one access way to the hazardous area, and each access way must be open at the same time. The key exchange unit accomplishes this by allowing one or more keys to be inserted which then releases multiple keys out. A typical process may require a rotary key switch to turn a motor off. The key from the rotary switch is removed and inserted into a KEX. The KEX then releases three keys which would allow simultaneous access to the hazard area through three different gates. This KEX is described as 1 key in 3 keys out. The keys in are considered primary codes, so the keys are not included in the KEX. The keys out are considered secondary codes, so the keys are included.
Relative Humidity Material
Optional Key Exchange Cabinets

Number of Keys Painted Mild Steel 711 way (max) 1215 way (max) 1625 way (max) Stainless Steel 1215 way (max) 1625 way (max) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 210 (8.26) 210 (8.26) 440T-AIPB40 440T-AIPB44 400 (15.7) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 200 (7.87) 210 (8.26) 210 (8.26) 440T-AIPB30 440T-AIPB33 440T-AIPB34 Length [mm (in.)] Width [mm (in.)] Depth [mm (in.)] Cat. No.
Features
A range of off-the-shelf units in various combinations 316L stainless steel construction Primary key(s) in release secondary keys simultaneously on units up to six ways Weatherproof stainless steel dust cap as standard Replaceable code barrel assembly

R
3-121
Power
Logic
11-Cat. No. Index
9-
Principles
General
Standards
EN1088, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, AS4024.1
Safety Switches
Exchange Units
Product Selection
Key Exchange Units Number of Keys 2 way 3 way 4 way 5 way 6 way 4 way 5 way 6 way 6 way 7 way 8 way 9 way 10 way 11 way 12 way 13 way 14 way 15 way 16 way 17 way 18 way 19 way 20 way 21 way Keys In and Out 1 key in 1 key out 1 key in 2 keys out 1 key in 3 keys out 1 key in 4 keys out 1 key in 5 keys out 2 key in 2 keys out 2 key in 3 keys out 2 key in 4 keys out 3 key in 3 keys out 1 key in 6 keys out 1 key in 7 keys out 1 key in 8 keys out 1 key in 9 keys out 1 key in 10 keys out 1 key in 11 keys out 1 key in 12 keys out 1 key in 13 keys out 1 key in 14 keys out 1 key in 15 keys out 1 key in 16 keys out 1 key in 17 keys out 1 key in 18 keys out 1 key in 19 keys out 1 key in 20 keys out 1 key in 21 keys out 1 key in 22 keys out 1 key in 23 keys out 1 key in 24 keys out Cat. No. 440T-MKEXE10 440T-MKEXE11 440T-MKEXE12 440T-MKEXE13 440T-MKEXE14 440T-MKEXE15 440T-MKEXE16 440T-MKEXE17 440T-MKEXE18 440T-MKEXE19 440T-MKEXE20 440T-MKEXE22 440T-MKEXE23 440T-MKEXE24 440T-MKEXE25 440T-MKEXE26 440T-MKEXE27 440T-MKEXE28 440T-MKEXE29 440T-MKEXE30 440T-MKEXE33 440T-MKEXE34 440T-MKEXE35 440T-MKEXE36 440T-MKEXE37 440T-MKEXE38 440T-MKEXE39 440T-MKEXE40
111 (4.37)
55.5 (2.18)
87 (3.43)
87 (3.43)
General Principles
9-
22 way 23 way 24 way 25 way
Specify the codes individually for each primary key in (key not included) and for each secondary key (key included). See 3-107 for code selection. Consult factory for other configurations of keys in and keys out.
Accessories
Description Stainless steel key Stainless steel replacement code barrel with dust cap Stainless steel weatherproof replacement dust cap Mild steel cabinet for 7-11-way units Mild steel cabinet for 12-15-way units Optional Key Exchange Cabinet Mild steel cabinet for 16-25-way units Stainless steel cabinet for 12-15-way units Stainless steel cabinet for 16-25-way units
Additional Information 3-140
Cat. No. 440T-AKEYE101 440T-ASCBE141 440T-ASFC101 440T-AIPB30 440T-AIPB33 440T-AIPB34 440T-AIPB40 440T-AIPB44

(4, 5 or) 6 Way Key Exchange Unit
200 (7.87) 169 ( 6.65) 4 Fixing Holes 8.6 (0.33) Dia. 56 (2.20) 27.5 (1.08) 185 ( 7.28)
(2) 3 Way Key Exchange Unit

200 (7.87) 169 ( 6.65) 27.5 (1.08) 185 ( 7.28) 4 Fixing Holes 8.6 (0.33) Dia.
Key Exchange Cabinets

(painted mild steel or stainless steel)
3-122
Safety Switches
Bolt Interlocks
Specifications
Safety Ratings
Category Certifications Operating Characteristics Operating Temperature [C (F)] Mechanical Life Shear Force to Key Torque to Key Relative Humidity Weight [kg (lbs)] Material Mounting Bolt Diameter
Cat. 1 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1) Suitable for Cat. 2, 3, or 4 systems CE Marked for all applicable directives and BG; C-Tick not required Mechanical: -40+200 (-40+392) Electrical: -20+80 (-4+176 ) Solenoid: -20+60 (-4+140)
Description
The bolt interlocks are designed to allow access to hazardous areas when an appropriate key is inserted into the interlock. These bolt interlocks are manufactured in 316L stainless steel to provide a rugged, industrial grade method of helping prevent access through gates. One advantage of the bolt interlocks is that there is no need to run power wires to the gate. Power is disconnected by a trapped key rotary switch on a control panel and the key is then hand-carried to the gate by the operator. The Single Bolt interlock (SBL) is designed to be used to access hazardous areas where partial body exposure is required. The SBL is not shipped with a key. If two keys are needed for partial body access, select the Dual Bolt interlock (DBL) that requires both keys to be trapped to operate. This version of the DBL does not include the keys. When whole body access is needed, the DBL, with one primary key and one secondary trapped key (included) should be used. The secondary key serves the function of a personnel key. This DBL allows the operator to carry the personnel key into the hazardous area. When the operator returns from the hazardous area and returns the personnel key to the DBL, the locking sequence can be reversed and the process re-started.
15.1 kN (3398 lbs), max. 14 Nm (124 lbin), max. 95% SBL: 0.60 (1.32) DBL: 1.10 (2.43) 316L stainless steel SBL: 2 x M5 counterbored from top or 2 x M5 from underside with M5 nuts DBL: 4 x M5 counterbored from top or 4 x M5 from underside with M5 nuts 15 mm (0.59 in.)
Features
316L stainless steel construction Various extensions of bolt Direct drive push/pull operation Replaceable code barrel assembly Fitted with tamper resistant screws Weatherproof stainless steel dust cap as standard Solenoid and electric versions Multiple key options

R
3-123
Power
Logic
11-Cat. No. Index
9-
Principles
100,000 operations
General
Standards
EN1088, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, AS4024.1
Safety Switches
Bolt Interlocks
Product Selection - Mechanical
Type Trapped Key Condition Bolt Retracted [mm (in.)] 0 Single key Key trapped to retract bolt 3 (0.11) 6 (0.23) 13 (0.51) 0 Both keys trapped to retract bolt Dual key 3 (0.11) 6 (0.23) 13 (0.51) 0 3 (0.11) 6 (0.23) Primary key trapped, secondary key free to retract bolt Dual Key with Secondary Ejector Key 13 (0.51) 0 3 (0.11) 6 (0.23) 13 (0.51) 0 Three keys trapped to retract bolt 3 (0.11) 6 (0.23) 13 (0.51) 0 Triple key Two primary trapped, one secondary key free to retract bolt 3 (0.11) 6 (0.23) 13 (0.51) 0 One primary trapped, two secondary keys free to retract bolt Bolt Extended [mm (in.)] 14 (0.55) 17 (0.66) 20 (0.78) 27 (1.06) 14 (0.55) 17 (0.66) 20 (0.78) 27 (1.06) 14 (0.55) 17 (0.66) 20 (0.78) 27 (1.06) 14 (0.55) 17 (0.66) 20 (0.78) 20 (0.78) 14 (0.55) 17 (0.66) 20 (0.78) 27 (1.06) 14 (0.55) 17 (0.66) 20 (0.78) 27 (1.06) 14 (0.55) 17 (0.66) 20 (0.78) 27 (1.06) 14 (0.55) 17 (0.66) 20 (0.78) 27 (1.06) 14 (0.55) 17 (0.66) 20 (0.78) 27 (1.06) Cat. No. 440T-MSBLE101 440T-MSBLE111 440T-MSBLE121 440T-MSBLE131 440T-MDBLE1011 440T-MDBLE1111 440T-MDBLE1211 440T-MDBLE1311 440T-MDBLE141 440T-MDBLE151 440T-MDBLE161 440T-MDBLE171 440T-MDBLJ141 440T-MDBLJ151 440T-MDBLJ161 440T-MDBLJ171 440T-MTBLE10111 440T-MDBLE11111 440T-MTBLE12111 440T-MTBLE13111 440T-MTBLE1411 440T-MTBLE1511 440T-MTBLE1611 440T-MTBLE1711 440T-MTBLE181 440T-MTBLE191 440T-MTBLE201 440T-MTBLE211 440T-MQBLE101111 440T-MQBLE111111 440T-MQBLE121111 440T-MQBLE131111 440T-MQBLE14111 440T-MQBLE15111 440T-MQBLE16111 440T-MQBLE17111
General Principles
9-
3 (0.11) 6 (0.23) 13 (0.51) 0 3 (0.11) 6 (0.23) 13 (0.51) 0 3 (0.11) 6 (0.23) 13 (0.51)
Four keys trapped to retract bolt Quad key Three primary trapped, one secondary key free to retract bolt
Substitute the desired secondary code for this symbol (key included). See 3-107 for code selection.
Product Selection - Electrical

Contact Type Type Trapped Key Condition Bolt Retracted [mm (in.)] 0 Free key to retract bolt Single key Key trapped to retract bolt 2 N.C. & 1 N.O. break before make Both keys trapped to retract bolt Dual key Primary key trapped, secondary key free to retract bolt 3 (0.11) 6 (0.23) 13 (0.51) 0 3 (0.11) 6 (0.23) 13 (0.51) 0 3 (0.11) 6 (0.23) 13 (0.51) 0 3 (0.11) 6 (0.23) 13 (0.51)
Bolt Extended [mm (in.)] 14 (0.55) 17 (0.66) 20 (0.78) 27 (1.06) 14 (0.55) 17 (0.66) 20 (0.78) 27 (1.06) 14 (0.55) 17 (0.66) 20 (0.78) 27 (1.06) 14 (0.55) 17 (0.66) 20 (0.78) 27 (1.06)
Cat. No. 440T-MSBSE101 440T-MSBSE111 440T-MSBSE121 440T-MSBSE131 440T-MSBSE331 440T-MSBSE341 440T-MSBSE351 440T-MSBSE361 440T-MDBSE1011 440T-MDBSE1111 440T-MDBSE1211 440T-MDBSE1311 440T-MDBSE141 440T-MDBSE151 440T-MDBSE161 440T-MDBSE171
3-124
Safety Switches
Bolt Interlocks
Product Selection - Solenoid
0 Free key to retract bolt Single key Key trapped to retract bolt 24V DC 2 N.C. & 1 N.O. break before make Both keys trapped to retract bolt Dual key Primary key trapped, secondary key free to retract bolt 3 (0.11) 6 (0.23) 13 (0.51) 0 3 (0.11) 6 (0.23) 13 (0.51) 0 3 (0.11) 6 (0.23) 13 (0.51) 0 3 (0.11) 6 (0.23) 13 (0.51)
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107 for code selection. Substitute the desired secondary code for this symbol (key included). See 3-107 for code selection.
14 (0.55) 17 (0.66) 20 (0.78) 27 (1.06) 14 (0.55) 17 (0.66) 20 (0.78) 27 (1.06) 14 (0.55) 17 (0.66) 20 (0.78) 27 (1.06) 14 (0.55) 17 (0.66) 20 (0.78) 27 (1.06)
440T-MSBUE101 440T-MSBUE111 440T-MSBUE121 440T-MSBUE131 440T-MSBUE331 440T-MSBUE341 440T-MSBUE351 440T-MSBUE361 440T-MDBUE1011 440T-MDBUE1111 440T-MDBUE1211 440T-MDBUE1311 440T-MDBUE141 440T-MDBUE151 440T-MDBUE161 440T-MDBUE171
Description Stainless steel key Stainless steel replacement code barrel with dust cap Stainless steel weatherproof replacement dust cap Stainless steel ejector key
Cat. No. 440T-AKEYE101 440T-ASCBE141 440T-ASFC101 440T-AKEYE131
3-140

MSBLE10, 11, 12, and 13

FIXING HOLES M5 CLEARANCE, CBORED
MDBLE10, 11, 12, and 13

3.5 (0.14)
15.8 (0.62)
M5 C'BORES
57.7 (2.27)
30 (1.18) 44.3 19.8 (1.74) & 28.5 (1.12) (0.78) PITCHES
14.6 (0.57)
48.5 (1.91)
44.3 28.5 (1.12) 20 (1.74) & 30 (1.18) (0.79) PITCHES 5.8 (0.23) 14.6 (0.57) 3.5 (0.14) 30.5 (1.2) 57.7 (2.27) 3.5 (0.14)
48.5 (1.91)
15.8 (0.62) 36.3 (1.43)
25.3 (1)
22.8 (0.9)
KEY #2
WEATHER CAP M5 LOCKING SCREW 3 PADS FOR UNDER PANEL MOUNTING 25.4 (1)
12 (0.47)
KEY #1
30 (1.18)
3.9 (0.15) 92 (3.62)
124 (4.88) 30 (1.18)

FRONT FIXINGS TAPPED M5
55 (2.17) 12 (0.47) 30 (1.18) CRS 30 (1.18)

FRONT FIXING POINTS TAPPED M5
X BOLT PROJECTION 14 mm (0.55 in.) THROW
Type
59.7 (2.35) 65.5 (2.58)
X [mm (in.)] 0 (0) 3 (0.12) 6 (0.24) 13 (0.51)
440T-MDBLE10 440T-MDBLE11 440T-MDBLE12 440T-MDBLE13

R
3-125
Power
Logic
11-Cat. No. Index
9-
Accessories
Principles
General
Solenoid Voltage
Contact Type
Type
Trapped Key Condition
Bolt Retracted [mm (in.)]
Bolt Extended [mm (in.)]
Cat. No.
Safety Switches
Bolt Interlocks
General Principles
9-
MDBLE14, 15, 16, and 17

M5 C'BORES
MTBLE10, 11, 12, and 13

15.8 (0.62)
15.8 (0.62)
57.7 (2.27)
181 (7.13) 57.7 (2.27)
57.7 (2.27)
44.3 & 30 (1.18) 20 (1.74) PITCHES (0.79) 3.5 (0.14) 5.8 (0.23) 30.5 (1.2) 57.7 (2.27) 3.5 (0.14)
28.5 (1.12)
48.5 (1.91)
28.5 (1.12) & 30 (1.18) CRS

M5 CLEARANCE X mm RETRACTED 14 mm (0.55 in.) THROW
25.3 (1) 22.8 (0.9)
48.5 (1.91)
PRIMARY #3
PRIMARY #2
PRIMARY #1
SECONDARY
12 (0.47)
PRIMARY
30 (1.18)
14.6 (0.57) 30 (1.18) 5.8 (0.23)
124 (4.88) 30 (1.18)

X BOLT PROJECTION 14 mm (0.55 in.) THROW FRONT FIXINGS TAPPED M5
12 (0.47)
14.6 (0.57)
Type 440T-MTBLE10 X [mm (in.)] 0 (0) 3 (0.12) 6 (0.24) 13 (0.51) 440T-MTBLE11 440T-MTBLE12 440T-MTBLE13
X [mm (in.)] 0 (0) 3 (0.12) 6 (0.24) 13 (0.51)
Type 440T-MDBLE14 440T-MDBLE15
440T-MDBLE16 440T-MDBLE17
MQBLE10, 11, 12, and 13

239 (9.41)
15.8 (0.62)
MSBSE10, 11, 12, and 13

15 (0.59)
57.7 (2.27) 57.7 (2.27)
57.7 (2.27)
M5 C'BORES
15.8 (0.62)
73.8 (2.91) 4 (0.16)
M5 CLEARANCE
14.6 (0.57)
28.5 (1.12) & 30 (1.18) CRS
8 (0.31)
48.5 (1.91)
28.5 (1.12) & 30 (1.18) 19.8 PITCHES (0.78) 5.8 (0.23)

X mm RETRACTED 14 mm (0.55 in.) THROW
58 40 (1.57) (2.28)
M5 CLEARANCE
X mm RETRACTED 14 mm (0.55 in.) THROW
30.5 (1.2) 59.7 (2.35) 145 (5.71)

SAFETY CONTACTS
SECONDARY
PRIMARY #4
PRIMARY #3
PRIMARY #2
PRIMARY #1
14.6 (0.57) 29.5 (1.16)
12 (0.47) 5.8 (0.23)
SWITCH LID
Type 440T-MQBLE10 440T-MQBLE11 440T-MQBLE12 440T-MQBLE13
X [mm (in.)] 0 (0) 3 (0.12) 6 (0.24) 13 (0.51) Type 440T-MSBSE10 440T-MSBSE11 440T-MSBSE12 440T-MSBSE13 X [mm (in.)] 0 (0) 3 (0.12) 6 (0.24) 13 (0.51)
3-126
Safety Switches
Bolt Interlocks
MDBSE10, 11, 12, and 13

3.5 (0.14) TYP.
MSBUE33, 34, 35, and 36

SAFETY CONTACTS
28.5 (1.12) & 30 (1.18) PITCHES
AUXILIARY CONTACTS
6 X M5
28.5 (1.12) & 30 (1.18) PITCHES
3.5 (0.14) TYP.
M5 SLOTS
44.3 (1.74)
14.6 (0.57)
40 58 (1.57) (2.28)
44.3 (1.74)
14.6 (0.57)
40 59 (1.57) (2.32)
X mm EXTENDED 14 mm (0.55 in.) RETRACTED
8 (0.31) 57.7 (2.27) 73.6 (2.9)
15.8 (0.62)
15.8 (0.62)
73.6 (2.9)
8 (0.31)
30.5 (1.2)
SECONDARY KEY
57.7 (2.27)
PRIMARY KEY
30.5 (1.2)
KEY SUPPLIED SEPERATELY
TROJAN 5 SWITCH MODULE
M20 CONDUIT ENTRIES
SPARTAN SWITCH MODULE 24V DC SOLENOID M20 CONDUIT ENTRY
30 (1.18) 25.4 (1)
12 (0.47) 5.8 (0.23) 202.4 (7.97)
25.4 (1) 12 (0.47) 5.8 (0.23) 176 (6.93)
Type 440T-MDBSE10 440T-MDBSE11 440T-MDBSE12 440T-MDBSE13
X [mm (in.)] 0 (0) 3 (0.12) 6 (0.24) 13 (0.51) Type 440T-MSBUE33 440T-MSBUE34 440T-MSBUE35 440T-MSBUE36 X [mm (in.)] 14 (0.55) 17 (0.67) 20 (0.79) 27 (1.06) Y [mm (in.)] 0 (0) 3 (0.12) 6 (0.24) 13 (0.51)
MDBUE14, 15, 16, and 17

28.5 (1.12) & 30 (1.18) PITCHES 3.5 (0.14) TYP.
6 x M5
14.6 (0.57)
15.8 (0.62)
57.7 (2.27) 30.5 (1.2) 57.7 (2.27)
73.6 (2.9)
8 (0.31)
SECONDARY KEY
PRIMARY KEY
SPARTAN SWITCH MODULE 24V DC SOLENOID

M20 CONDUIT ENTRY
25.4 (1) 12 (0.47) 5.8 (0.23)

14 mm (0.55 in.) EXTENDED 0 mm (0 in.) RETRACTED
233 (9.17)

R
3-127
Power
Logic
11-Cat. No. Index
44.3 (1.74)
58 40 (1.57) (2.28)
9-
X mm EXTENDED Y mm RETRACTED
Principles
General
Safety Switches
Access/Chain Interlocks
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards Category Certifications Operating Characteristics Operating Temperature [C (F)] Relative Humidity Mechanical Life Physical Characteristics Misalignment Tolerance Shear Force to Key Torque to Key Material 10 mm (0.39 in.) 15.1 kN (3398 lbs), max. 14 Nm (124 lbin), max. 316L stainless steel SAL and SCL: 2 or 4 x M5 counterbored from top or 2 or 4 x M5 from underside with nuts DAL and DCL: 4 or 6 x M5 counterbored from top or 4 or 6 x M5 from underside with nuts SAL and SCL: 0.8 (1.8) DAL and DCL: 1.35 (3) Mechanical: -40+200 (-40+392 ) Electrical: -20+80 (-4+176 ) Solenoid: -20+60 (-4+140) 95% 100,000 operations EN1088, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1) Suitable for Cat. 2, 3, or 4 systems CE Marked for all applicable directives and BG; C-Tick not required
General Principles
9Description
The access interlocks are designed to allow access to hazardous areas when an appropriate key is inserted into the interlock. These access interlocks are manufactured in 316L stainless steel to provide rugged, industrial grade method of helping prevent access through gates. They are actuated by either a lever or a rod which is connected to chain. One advantage of the access interlocks is that there is no need to run power wires to the gate. Power is disconnected by a trapped key rotary switch on a control panel and the key is then handcarried to the gate by the operator. The Single-key Access Lock (SAL) and Single-key Chain Lock (SCL) are designed to be used to access hazardous areas where partial body exposure is required. If two keys are needed for partial body access, select the Dual-key Access Lock (DAL) or Dual-key Chain Lock (DCL) with both keys trapped.
Mounting
Weight [kg (lbs)]
When whole body access is needed, the DAL or DCL, with one key trapped and one key free should be used. The secondary key serves the function of a personnel key. The DAL and DCL allow the operator to carry the personnel key into the hazardous area. When the operator returns from the hazardous area and returns the personnel key to the DAL or DCL, the locking sequence can be reversed and the process restarted.
Features
316L stainless steel construction Direct drive operation Fitted with tamper resistant screws Stainless steel dust cap as standard Replaceable code barrel assembly Solenoid and electric versions Multiple key options
3-128
Safety Switches
Product Selection - Mechanical
Type Single key Actuator Type Lever Chain Extended Lever Single key with padlock hasp Lever Chain Lever Dual key Chain Trapped Key Condition Key trapped to release lever Key trapped to release chain Key trapped to release lever Key trapped to release lever Key trapped to release chain Primary key trapped, secondary key free to release lever Both keys trapped to release lever Primary key trapped, secondary key free to release chain Both keys trapped to release chain Dual key with padlock hasp Dual key with eject key Lever Lever Chain Lever Triple key Chain Primary key trapped, secondary key free to release lever Primary key trapped, secondary spring eject key One primary trapped, two secondary keys free to release lever One primary trapped, two secondary keys free to release chain Cat. No. 440T-MSCLE101 440T-MSALE201 440T-MSALE111 440T-MSCLE111 440T-MDALE101 440T-MDALE1111
440T-MDCLE1111 440T-MDALE451 440T-MDALJ101 440T-MDCLJ101 440T-MTALE111 440T-MTCLE111

Contact Type Type Actuator Type Trapped Key Condition Both keys trapped to release lever Primary key trapped, secondary key free to release lever Both keys trapped to release chain Primary key trapped, secondary key free to release chain Cat. No. 440T-MDASE2111
Lever 2 N.C. & 1 N.O. break before make Dual Key Chain
440T-MDCSE2111 440T-MDCSE201
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107 for code selection. Substitute the desired secondary code for this symbol (key included). See 3-107 for code selection.
Accessories
Description Stainless steel key Stainless steel replacement code barrel with dust cap Stainless steel weatherproof replacement dust cap Replacement actuator type lever Replacement actuator type chain Stainless steel ejector key
Additional Information 3-140
Cat. No. 440T-ASCBE141 440T-ASFC101 440T-ACAD10 440T-ACHA10 440T-AKEYE131

R
3-129
Power
Logic
11-Cat. No. Index
440T-AKEYE101
440T-MDASE201
9-
Principles
440T-MDCLE101
General
440T-MSALE101
Safety Switches
Dimensions not intended to be used for installation purposes.
MSALE10
24.4 (0.96)
MSALE11
25.4 (1)
General Principles
9-
28.5 (1.12) PITCH MIN.
12.7 (0.5) 3.5 (0.14) CRS
12.7 (0.5) 28.5 (1.12) PITCH MIN. 3.5 (0.14) CRS

HASP EXTENDED CATCH FREE
28.5 (1.12) 44.5 & 30 (1.18) (1.75) CRS
48.5 (1.91)
28.5 (1.12) & 30 (1.18) CRS
44.5 48.5 (1.75) (1.91)
35.3 (1.39) 10 PITCH M5 C'BORED (0.39) MAX. FIXINGS
35.3 (1.39) PITCH MAX.
10 (0.39)
CHAIN ASSEMBLY FOR SCLE10
CATCH ASSY FOR 440T-MSCLE11
92.4 (3.64)
28 25.4 (1) (1.1)
92.4 (3.64) 25.4 27.4 (1) (1.08)

CATCH ASSY FOR 440T-MSALE11
12 (0.47)
CATCH ASSEMBLY FOR SALE10
12 (0.47) 60 (2.36)
59.7 (2.35)
MDALE10 and MDCLE10

25.4 (1)
M5 C'BORED FIXINGS
MDALE11
25.4 (1) 12.7 (0.5) 28.5 (1.12) MIN. CRS
44.3 48.5 (1.74) (1.91)
28.5 (1.12) PITCH MIN.
12.7 (0.5) 3.5 (0.14)
M5 C'BORED FIXINGS
3.5 (0.14)
28.5 (1.12) & 30 (1.18) CRS
28.5 (1.12) & 30 (1.18) CRS
44.3 48.5 (1.74) (1.91) 10 (0.39) 57.7 (2.27)
SECONDARY
PRIMARY
10 (0.39) 35.3 (1.39) PITCH MAX.
57.7 (2.27) CRS
35.3 (1.39) MAX. CRS
DCLE10 CATCH ASSY.
57.7 (2.27) 30.5 (1.2) 92.4 (3.64) 25.4 30 (1) (1.18)
DCLE CATCH ASSY.
30.5 (1.2) 57.7 (2.27)
12 (0.47)
DALE10 CATCH ASSY.
12 (0.47)
118 (4.65)
25.4 30 (1) (1.18)

DALE CATCH ASSY.
118 (4.65)
3-130
Safety Switches
Dimensions not intended to be used for installation purposes.
HASP
8 (0.31) HOLE
5.4 (0.21) 3.4 (0.13)
10 (0.39)
57.7 (2.27) 3.5 (0.14) M5 CLEARANCE
175 (6.89) 57.7 (2.27)
35.3 (1.39)
28.5 (1.12) 30 (1.18) CRS
48.5 (1.91)
PRIMARY
12.7 (0.5)
VIEW WITH CATCH TRAPPED
3 (0.12) 30.5 (1.2)

PRIMARY
SECONDARY
SECONDARY KEYS SUPPLIED FITTED
SECONDARY #2
SECONDARY #1
30 (1.18) 12 (0.47)
VIEW WITH CATCH FREE
MTCLE11
175 (6.89)
10 (0.39)
48.5 (1.91)
28.5 (1.12) & 30 (1.18) CRS

VIEW WITH CATCH TRAPPED
SECONDARY KEYS SUPPLIED FITTED
SECONDARY #2
SECONDARY #1
PRIMARY
12 (0.47)
VIEW WITH CATCH FREE
30 (1.18)

R
3-131
Power
Logic
11-Cat. No. Index
57.7 (2.27) 3.5 (0.14) M5 CLEARANCE
57.7 (2.27)
9-
Principles
General
MDALE45
MTALE11
Safety Switches
Slamlock Mechanical
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards Category Certifications Operating Characteristics Operating Temperature [C (F)] Single Dual Mechanical Life Code Barrel Life Shear Force to Key Torque to Key Relative Humidity Weight [kg (lbs)] Ambient Temperature [C (F)] Material Mounting Holding Force, Max. -40+200 (-40+392 ) In excess of 100,000 operations under normal working conditions Tested to 100,000 operations 15.1 kN (3398 lbs), max. 14 Nm (124 lbin), max. 95% Single Key: 0.76 (1.68) Dual Key: 1.33 (2.93) -10+50 (14122 ) 316L stainless steel SSL: 2 x M5 counterbored from top or 2 x M5 from underside with nuts DSS: 4 x M5 counterbored from top or 4 x M5 from underside with nuts 2000 N (450 lbs) EN1088, IEC/EN60947-5-1, GS-ET-19, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1) Suitable for Cat. 2, 3, or 4 systems CE Marked for all applicable directives and BG; C-Tick not required
General Principles
9Description
The Prosafe Slamlock combines the features of trapped keys with tongue actuated interlocks. When the actuator is inserted into the interlock (guard closed), the trapped key can be rotated and removed. With the key free, the actuator can not be removed thus locking closed the guard door. The trapped key must be re-inserted and rotated 90 to unlock the guard. Slamlocks are manufactured in 316L stainless steel to provide a rugged, industrial grade method of interlocking guard doors. One advantage of the slamlock is that there is no need to run power wires to the gate. Power is disconnected by a trapped key on a control panel or by a Prosafe RKS type unit and the key is then hand-carried to the gate by the operator. The Single-key Slamlock (SSL) is used to interlock hatches, guards and doors where full body access is not required. Dual-key Slamlock (DSL) is similar to the single key version but has a secondary key to allow "two key in" or "key exchange" conditions. The key exchange version may be used where whole body access is required, as the secondary key can be used as a personnel key.
Features
316L stainless steel construction Selection of actuator types available Direct drive operation Replaceable code barrel assembly Fitted with tamper resistant screws Weatherproof stainless steel dust cap as standard Multiple key options
3-132
Safety Switches
Slamlock Mechanical
Product Selection
Type Single key Actuator Type Standard Flexible Flat Standard Flexible Dual key Flat Standard Flexible Flat Standard Dual with secondary ejector key Flexible Flat
Trapped Key Condition Key trapped to release actuator
Cat. No. 440T-MSSLE111 440T-MSSLE121 440T-MDSLE101 440T-MDSLE111 440T-MDSLE121 440T-MDSLE2011 440T-MDSLE2211 440T-MDSLJ101
Primary key trapped, secondary key free to release actuator
Both keys trapped to release actuator
Primary key trapped, secondary key free to release actuator
440T-MDSLJ111 440T-MDSLJ121
Accessories
Description Stainless steel key Stainless steel ejector key Stainless steel replacement code barrel with dust cap Stainless steel weatherproof replacement dust cap GD2 standard actuator GD2 flat actuator Fully flex actuator
Cat. No. 440T-AKEYE10 440T-AKEYE13 440T-ASFC10
3-140
440G-A27011 440K-A11112 440G-A27143

Single Key Slamlock

4 (0.16) 3.5 (0.14)
Dual Key Slamlock

M5 Counterbored from Top. M5 Fixing from Underside Using M5 Nuts in Recesses 20.8 (0.81) 48 (1.88) 57.7 (2.27) 3.5 (0.13) 28.5 (1.12) & 30 (1.18) Pitch Range
3.5 (0.13)
20.8 (0.82)
ACTUATOR, SEE BELOW
28.5 30 (1.12) (1.18)
4.9 (0.19)
TOP ENTRY
M5 C'BORES ON TOP AND BOTTOM FACES
64.1 (2.52)
57 (2.24)
Top Entry
38.3 (1.5) 43.6 (1.71) 64.1 (2.52)
57.7 (2.27)
92.4 (3.63)
34 (1.33)
5 (0.2)
5.5 (0.22)
37 (1.46)
4 (0.16)
5.8 (0.23) 8 (0.31)
10 (0.39)
5.5 (2.2)
40 (1.57) 20 (0.79)
4.4 17.5 (0.17) (0.69)
8 (0.31)
20.8 (0.81)
52 (2.05) 36 (1.42)
18 (0.71) 14.5 (0.57)
40 (1.57)
52 (2.05)
40 (1.57)
13 (0.51) 19 (0.75)
18 (0.71)
WITH 440T-MSSLE11
20.2 (0.8)
36 25 (1.42) (0.98)
57 (2.24)
3.5 (0.14)
WITH 440T-MSSLE10
WITH 440T-MSSLE12
Flat Actuator
17.5 (0.69) 3.5 (0.14)
Flexible/Adjustable Actuator
6.8 (0.27) Adjusting screws 52 (2.05) 40 (1.57) 31 (1.22 18 (0.71) 13 (0.51) 19 (0.75) 51(2.01)
Standard Actuator
18 (0.71) 36 (1.42)
57 (2.24)
2 x M3
40 (1.57) 52 (2.05) M5 CSK 14.5 (0.57)
25 (0.98)
8 (0.31)
36 (1.42)
20 (0.79)
4 x 5.5 (0.22)
3.5 (0.14)

R
3-133
Power
4 (0.16)
Logic
5.5 (0.22) FRONT 6.6 (0.26) 3.5 (0.14)
20.8 (0.82)
92 (3.62) 51 (2.01)
4 (0.16)
151 (5.94) Bottom Entry
25.4 (1.0)
34.6 (1.36)
5 (0.19)
Front Entry
Code Barrel Screws M4 x 8 Torx Head
Secondary
Primary
11-Cat. No. Index
31.6 (1.24) 43.6 (1.72)
Substitute the desired code for this symbol. See 3-107 for code selection.
9-
440T-ASCBE141
Principles
440T-MDSLE2311
General
440T-MSSLE101
Safety Switches
Slamlock Electrical
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards Category Certifications Outputs Safety Contacts Switching Current @ Voltage, Max. Thermal Current (Ith) Single Dual Current, Min. Safety Contact Gap Rated Insulation Voltage Rated Impulse withstand Voltage Auxiliary Contacts Operating Characteristics Break Contact Force, Min. Actuation Speed, Max. Actuation Frequency, Max. Utilization Category AC 15 DC Environmental Characteristics Enclosure Type Rating Operating Temperature [C (F)] Relative Humidity Physical Characteristics Actuator Travel for Positive Opening Operating Radius, Min. Actuator Holding Force, Max. 5 mm (0.19 in.) 175 mm (6.88 in.) [60 mm (2.36 in.) with flexible actuator] 2000 N (450 lbs) 100 N (22.5 lbs) UL Approved glass-filled polyester & 316L stainless steel Stainless steel 3 x M20 SSS: 4 x M5 counterbored from top or 4 x M5 from underside with nuts DSS: 6 x M5 counterbored from top or 6 x M5 from underside with nuts 100,000 operations 1,000,000 operations SSE: 1160 (2.6) DSSE: 1700 (3.7) Red/Stainless 15.1 kN (3398 lbs), max. 3 14 Nm (124 lbin), max. IP67 Electrical: -20+80 (-4+176) Solenoid: -20+60 (-4+140 ) 95% (Ue) 500V (le) 1 A 250V 250V 2A 0.5 A, 24V 100V 5A 2A 12 N (2.7 lbs) 1 ms 2 cycle/s 2 N.C. positive break 500V/500V A 10 A 5 mA @ 5V DC >2 x 2 mm (0.07 in.) (Ui) 500V (Uimp) 2500V 1 N.O. EN1088, IEC/EN60947-5-1, GS-ET19, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1) Suitable for Cat. 2, 3, or 4 systems CE Marked for all applicable directives and BG; C-Tick not required
General Principles
9Description
The Prosafe Slamlock with electrical isolation combines the features of trapped key tongue actuated interlocks while also providing sets of electrical safety and auxiliary contacts. When the actuator is inserted into the lock and the key is removed the actuator is trapped in the unit thus locking closed the guard door. In this state the safety contacts are closed and the auxiliary contacts are open. To open the guard door the key must be inserted and rotated 90, opening the safety contacts, closing the auxiliary contacts and enabling the actuator to be released thus unlocking the guard door. While the guard door is open the key is trapped in the unit. Slamlocks with electrical isolation offer the features of electrical safety interlock switches with the benefits of a trapped key/enforced sequence systems. They allow a combination of both approaches for safeguarding machinery and processes to be used. The Single-key Slamlock (SSS) is used to interlock hatches, guards and doors where full body access is not required. The single key locks the actuator and operates the switch in the same action. Dual-key Slamlock (DSS) is similar to the single key version but has a secondary key to allow "two key in" or "key exchange" conditions. The key exchange version may be used where whole body access is required, as the secondary key can be used as a personnel key.
Features
Electrical safety contacts combined with trapped key/enforced sequence feature Most of unit constructed from 316L stainless steel Selection of actuator types available Single or dual key versions available Direct drive operation Replaceable code barrel assembly Weatherproof stainless steel dust cap as standard Solenoid versions
Releasable Load, Max. Case Material Actuator Material Conduit Entry Mounting Mechanical Life Electrical Life Weight [g (lbs)] Color Shear Force to Key Pollution Degree Torque to Key
Note: The safety contacts of the Guardmaster switches are described as normally closed (N.C.), i.e. with the guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be started.
3-134
Safety Switches
Slamlock Electrical
Contact Type Type Trapped Key Condition Key trapped to release actuator Single key Key free to release actuator Primary key trapped, secondary key free to release actuator 2 N.C. + 1 N.O. Break before make Primary key trapped, secondary key eject to release actuator Primary key trapped, secondary key free to release actuator Dual key Primary key trapped, secondary key eject to release actuator Primary key trapped, secondary key free to release actuator Primary key trapped, secondary key eject to release actuator Both keys free to release actuator Actuator Type Standard Flexible Flat Standard Flexible Flat Cat. No. 440T-MSSSE111 440T-MSSSE121 440T-MSSSE201 440T-MSSSE221 440T-MSSSE231 440T-MDSSE101 Standard
440T-MDSSE111 Flexible 440T-MDSSJ111 440T-MDSSE121 Flat 440T-MDSSJ121 Standard Flexible Flat Standard 440T-MDSSE2011 440T-MDSSE2211 440T-MDSSE2311 440T-MSSSE261 440T-MSSSE271 440T-MSSSE251
2 N.C. + 2 N.O. Break before make
Single key
Key free to release actuator
Flexible Flat
Product Selection - Solenoid

Contact Type Type Single key 2 N.C. & 1 N.O. Break before make Trapped Key Condition Key free to release actuator Primary key trapped, secondary key free to release actuator Key free to release actuator Solenoid Voltage 24V DC Actuator Type Standard Flexible Flat Standard 24V DC Flexible Flat 110V AC Standard Dual key Cat. No. 440T-MSSUE201 440T-MSSUE221 440T-MSSUE231 440T-MDSUE101 440T-MDSUE111 440T-MSSUE121

Single Key Slamlock

38.3 (1.5)
3.5 (0.13)
Safety Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts
11 21 33 48 (1.88) 20.8 (0.81) 12 22 34 43.6 (1.71) 64.1 (2.52) Top Entry 4 x M5 40 (1.57)
Front Entry
5 (0.19)
20.8 (0.81)
4 (0.15) Bottom Entry
93 (3.66)
M20

R
3-135
Power
34 (1.33)
5.5 (0.21)
Logic
11-Cat. No. Index
Single key
440T-MSSUE501
9-
Principles
440T-MDSSJ101
General
440T-MSSSE101
Safety Switches
Slamlock Electrical
Dual Key Slamlock

4 (0.16) 20.8 (0.82) TOP ENTRY 3.5 (0.14)
5.5 (0.22) SLOTS AND HOLE
General Principles
9-
28.5 (1.12) & 30 (1.18) CRS
40 (1.57) 58 (2.28) 7 (0.28)

ACTUATOR (SEE BELOW)
4.9 (0.19) 43.6 (1.72)
20.5 (0.81) 57.7 (2.27)

SECONDARY
20.5 (0.81)
8 (0.31)
15 (0.59)
73.6 (2.9)
PRIMARY
5 (0.2) 37 (1.46) 20.8 (0.82) FRONT ENTRY 32.5 (1.28) 236 (9.29)
92.4 (3.64)
5.5 (0.22)
440G-A27011 STANDARD
6.6 (0.26) 5.5 (0.22) 52 40 (2.05) (1.6)
440G-A27143 FLEXIBLE
4 (0.16)
8 (0.31)
5.8 (0.23) 10 (0.39) 4.4 (0.17)
440K-A11112 FLAT
3.5 (0.14)
8 (0.31)
52 (2.05) 36 (1.42)
18 (0.71)
40 (1.6)
18 (0.71)
40 (1.6) 13 (0.51) 14.5 (0.57) 19 (0.75) 20.2 (0.8) 51 (2.01)
36 20 (1.42) (0.79) 25 (0.98)
17.5 (0.69) 3.5 (0.14) 57 (2.24)
4 (0.16)
30 (1.18) 28.5 (1.12) PITCHES 3.5 (0.14)
SLOTS FOR M5 SCREWS
5.5 (0.22) SLOTS & HOLE
3.5 (0.14)
20.8 (0.82) TOP ENTRY
40.2 59 (1.58) (2.32)
7 (0.28) ACTUATOR (SEE BELOW)
4.9 (0.19) 43.6 (1.72)
57.7 (2.27) 131.3 (5.17)

KEY#2
8 (0.31) 15 (0.59)
KEY#1
5 (0.2)
37
35 (1.38) 14 (0.55)
5.5 (0.22)
20.8 (0.82)
FRONT ENTRY
440G-A27011 STANDARD
440G-A27143 FLEXIBLE
4 (0.16)
3.5 (0.14)
6.6 (0.26) 5.5 (0.22) 40 (1.57) 52 40 (2.05) (1.57) 13 (0.51) 19 (0.75) 51 (2.01) 40 (1.57) 18 (0.71)
8 (0.31)
5.8 (0.23)
10 (0.39)
440K-A11112 FLAT
4.4 (0.17) 17.5 (0.69)
8 (0.31)
52 (2.05)
18 (0.71)
36 20 (1.42) (0.79) 20.2 (0.8) 25 (0.98)
36 (1.42)
14.5 (0.57)
57 (2.24)
3.5 (0.14)
3-136
Safety Switches
Slamlock Electrical
Accessories
Description Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
18 (0.71) 36 (1.42) 4 (0.16)
Cat. No.

40 (1.57) 52 (2.05) M5 CSK 14.5 (0.57)
440G-A27011
3.5 (0.14) 17.5 (0.69) 3.5 (0.14)
GD2 flat actuator
57 (2.24)
440K-A11112
25 (0.98)
6.8 (0.27) Adjusting screws 52 (2.05) 40 (1.57) 31 (1.22 2 x M3
18 (0.71) 13 (0.51) 19 (0.75) 51(2.01)
Fully flex actuator
440G-A27143
8 (0.31) 20 (0.79)
4 x 5.5 (0.22)
Stainless steel key
440T-AKEYE10
Stainless steel weatherproof replacement dust cap
440T-ASFC10
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107 for code selection. Substitute the desired code for this symbol. See 3-107 for code selection.
Typical Applications
Key
Contacts Housing Actuator
Locking force = 2000 N (450 lb)

R
3-137
Power
Logic
Actuator out, key trapped, safety contacts open, auxiliary contact closed.
11-Cat. No. Index
Stainless steel replacement code barrel with dust cap
page 3-140
440T-ASCBE141
9-
36 (1.42)
Principles
General
Safety Switches
Miniature Valve Interlocks

Specifications
Standards EN1088, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, AS4024.1 CE Marked for all applicable directives and BG -10+40 (14104 ) 100,000 operations 15.1 kN (3398 lbs) 14 Nm (124 lbin) 2595% 316L stainless steel
General Principles
9Features
Direct drive operation Supplied with valves 0.251 in. Direct body mounting with security screws Locked open or locked closed options Virtually maintenance free Weatherproof stainless steel dust cap as standard Replaceable code barrel assembly Valve is chrome-plated brass
Certifications Operating Temperature [C (F)] Mechanical Life Shear Force to Key Torque to Key Relative Humidity Material
Product Selection
Valve Size 0.25 in. BSP 0.375 in. BSP 0.5 in. BSP 0.25 in. BSP 0.375 in. BSP 0.5 in. BSP Key Free/Valve Locked Closed Key Free/Valve Locked Open Key Free/Valve Locked Closed Key Free/Valve Locked Open Key Free/Valve Locked Open Key Free/Valve Locked Closed Valve Status Cat. No. 440T-VMVLE101 440T-VMVLE111 440T-VMVLE121 440T-VMVLE131 440T-VMVLE141 440T-VMVLE151 440T-VMVLE181 440T-VMVLE191 440T-VMVLE201 440T-VMVLE211
1.0 in. BSP

LOCKING DISC
2.0 in. BSP
3-Trapped Key Switches 11-Cat. No. Index Logic

Model 440T-VMVLE10 440T-VMVLE11 440T-VMVLE12 440T-VMVLE13 440T-VMVLE14 440T-VMVLE15 440T-VMVLE16 440T-VMVLE17 440T-VMVLE18 440T-VMVLE19
6 (2.44)
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See
3-107 for code selection. BSP = British standard pipe threads.
70 (2.76)
CODE BARREL ASSEMBLY
Accessories
Description Stainless steel key Stainless steel replacement code barrel with dust cap Stainless steel weatherproof replacement dust cap 3-107 for code selection. 3-140 Additional Information Cat. No. 440T-AKEYE101 440T-ASCBE141 440T-ASFC101
6.35 mm (0.25 in.) BSSP ENTRIES BRASS BODY 10 mm (0.39 in.) BORE 50 BAR
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)] A 104 (4.1) 104 (4.1) 112 (4.4) 104 (4.1) 104 (4.1) 112 (4.4) 108 (4.3) 108 (4.3) 115 (4.5) 115 (4.5) B 68 (2.7) 68 (2.7) 80 (3.2) 68 (2.7) 68 (2.7) 80 (3.2) 110 (4.3) 110 (4.3) 110 (4.3) 110 (4.3) C 38 (1.5) 38 (1.5) 48 (1.9) 38 (1.5) 38 (1.5) 48 (1.9) 53 (2.1) 53 (2.1) 61 (2.4) 61 (2.4)
Power
3-138
Safety Switches
Switchgear Adaptors
Product Selection (3/8 square shaft)
Mounting Trap Direction 65 CW to trap 65 CCW to trap 90 CW to trap 2 x M4 90 CCW to trap 90 to trap 45 CW to trap 45 CCW to trap Cat. No. 440T-MSGAU111 440T-MSGAU121 440T-MSGAU131 440T-MSGAU141 440T-MSGAU171 440T-MSGAU181
The switch gear adaptor is used to interlock preparatory switch gear applications or other host equipment such as spool valves. Power is isolated and locked off when the key is rotated and removed. The key can then be used in the next sequence of operation.
Accessories
Description Stainless steel key Stainless steel ejector key Stainless steel weatherproof replacement dust cap 3-107 for code selection. 3-140 Additional Information Cat. No. 440T-AKEYE101 440T-AKEYE131 440T-ASFC101
Features
Virtually maintenance free
Specifications
Standards Category Certifications Operating Temperature [C (F)] Mechanical Life Shear Force to Key Torque to Key Relative Humidity Weight [kg (lbs)] Material Mounting Shaft Dimensions EN1088, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 per EN 954-1 CE Marked for all applicable directives and BG -10+50 (14122 ) >100,000 operations 15.1 kN (3398 lbs), max. 14 Nm (124 lbin), max. 95% 0.30 (0.66) 316L stainless steel 2 x M4 3/8 in2 x 7/8 in long (standard) 9/16 in dia. x 7/8 in long (optional: contact factory)

Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 45 Mounting Type Panel Drilling Detail
R8 (0.31) R8 (0.31)
50.8 (2) CRS
50.8 (2)
45 45
25 (0.98) 8 (0.31) R20.5 (0.81) R20.5 (0.81) 31.3 (1.23) 10 (0.39)

45
8 (0.31)
5 (0.2)
45
16 (0.63) HOLE 8 (0.31) HOLES CLOCKWISE TO TRAP KEY
16 (0.63) HOLE
PANEL DRILLING
8 (0.31) HOLES COUNTER CLOCKWISE TO TRAP KEY

R
3-139
Power
Logic
11-Cat. No. Index
9-
Principles
Description
3-107 for code selection.
General
440T-MSGAU101
Safety Switches
Accessories
Accessories
Description Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
50 (1.97)
HANDLE
Cat. No.
Stainless steel key
SPECIAL TAGGING AS REQUESTED BY CUSTOMER
63 (2.48)
SPECIAL LABELING
STANDARD LABELING WHITE CHARACTERS ON RED BACKGROUND ON BOTH SIDES
KEY WHEN FREE 50 (1.97)
40 (1.57)
90.5 (3.56)
74.5 (2.93)
Stainless steel ejector key

33.5 (1.32)
SPRING HOUSING
17.2 (0.68) 20 (0.79)
39 (1.54)
Stainless steel weatherproof replacement dust cap
16 (0.63)
Stainless steel replacement code barrel for 100 A unit rotary switch
23 (0.91)
10 (0.39)
2 Fixing Holes 4.5 (0.18) Dia
23 (0.91)
Stainless steel replacement code barrel with dust cap

2 Fixing Holes 4.5 (0.18) Dia 32 (1.26)
Description Emergency break glass key box Description
Material Plastic case Metal case with hammer Code ER1 ER2
ER3 ER4 Emergency repair kit for code barrels 2 offset pin code barrels with key ER5 ER6 ER7 ER8 ER9
Not suitable for 440T-MRKSE14/440T-MRPSE14 OR 440T-MSGAU units. WARNING: The presence of spare keys, override keys, or spare actuators can compromise the integrity of safety interlocking systems. Personal injury or death, property damage or economic loss can result from the introduction of spare keys, override keys or spare actuators into interlocking systems without appropriate management controls, working procedures and alternative protective measures to control their use and availability.
3-140
A
SEAL
STUB
KEY IN CODE BARREL
General Principles
9-
16 (0.63)
440T-AKEYE101
440T-AKEYE131
440T-ASFC101
42 (1.65)
440T-ASCBE111
32 (1.26)
42 (1.65)
440T-ASCBE141
Cat. No. 440T-AIPB11 440T-AIPB12 Cat. No. 440T-AKITE45ER1 440T-AKITE45ER2 440T-AKITE45ER3 440T-AKITE45ER4 440T-AKITE45ER5 440T-AKITE45ER6 440T-AKITE45ER7 440T-AKITE45ER8 440T-AKITE45ER9
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches

Overview
22 mm Small Plastic
22 mm Compact Metal
30 mm Large Metal
15 mm Plastic
General Description
The 440P limit switch family offers a full range of international-style solutions for both safety and standard sensing applications. Available in four different body styles30 mm metal, 22 mm metal and plastic, and 15 mm plasticwith a broad selection of operator types, circuit arrangements and connection options, the 440P is ideal for a wide variety of applications. These include material handling, packaging, elevators, escalators, scissor lifts, industrial trucks and tractors, cranes and hoists, overhead door as well as general safety guarding applications. The small, plastic-body style isavailable in the following operator types: Short lever Hinge lever Roller plunger Dome plunger Offset hinge lever The 15 mm plastic switch is available with top push roller and top push cross roller actuators.
Mechanical Enclosure
The large metal-body (440P-M) models feature die-cast alloy construction and conform to EN 50041 (30 x 60 mm), while the small plastic (440P-C) models are constructed of a glass-filled polymer and conform to EN 50047 (22 mm). Both body types are IP66 rated and available with M20 or 1/2 in. NPT conduit opening or in a micro quick-disconnect version. The 15 mm plastic models (440P-M18001 and 440P-M18002) are constructed of glass-filled polyester and are IP30 rated. The 22 mm metal models (440P-A) have a painted body and are IP66/IP67 rated.
Contact Arrangements
All 440P international-style limit switches contain positive openingaction contacts, making them ideal for safety-related applications. The small, plastic models include a choice of snap-acting, slowbreak/make with 2- or 3-contact configurations, while the largemetal switches contain snap-acting, slow-break contacts in 2-, 3-, or 4-contact configurations. The 15 mm plastic versions are slowbreak, 2-circuit models. The small metal models are all snap-acting, 2-circuit.
Actuator Type
The 440P international-style limit switches are available with a wide variety of actuators to solve a broad range of applications. All levertype switches include their respective actuator arm. The large, metal-body style is available in the following operator types: Metal roller plunger Metal dome plunger Metal short lever The compact metal body style is available in the following operator types: Roller plunger Dome plunger Short lever Cross roller plunger All, except the short lever, are available with panel mount threading.

R
3-141
Power
Logic
11-Cat. No. Index
3-Limit Switches
9-
Principles
General
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches

22 mm Compact Metal Position Switches
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, NFPA 79, EN 1088, ISO 14119, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS 4024.1 Cat. 1 Device per EN 954-1 Dual channel limit switch suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems when ganged together UL Recognized, TV and CE Marked for all applicable directives 1 N.C. snap acting 1 N.O. snap acting 10 A 300V AC
General Principles
9Description
The 22 mm IEC style metal safety limit switches have been developed to provide a small metal case with a choice of actuator heads. All units are supplied with an integral 2 m cable. For safety applications it is important that upon actuation, the guard or other moving objects should not pass completely over the switch and allow the plunger or lever to return to its original position.
Safety Classification Certifications Outputs Safety Contacts Auxiliary Contacts Thermal Current Rated Insulation Voltage Contact Rating
Maximum AC Contact Rating Per Pole NEMA Rating AC15/B300 AC15/B300 DC13/Q300 Actuation Speed, Max. Actuation Speed, Min. Mechanical Life Environmental Enclosure Type Rating Operating Temperature [C (F)] Pollution Degree Physical Characteristics Housing Material Actuator Material Mounting Die-cast alloy Various polymers and metals 2 x M14, any position IEC 68-2-6 (1055 Hz, 0.35 mm amplitude) IEC 68-2-7 (30 Gn 3 pulses per axis) 2 m (6.5 ft) cable Red body/black head NEMA 1, IP66/67 270 (35.6158 ) 3 Amperes Max. Voltage Make Break 120 30 240 15 240 0.27 3.0 1.5 0.27 Continuous Carrying Current (Amp.) 5 Volt Amperes Make Break 3600 360
Features
Rugged die cast enclosure Positive operation, forced disconnection of contacts (direct opening action) Snap-acting contact actuation Contacts 1 N.C. + 1 N.O. Pre-wired 2 m cable, bottom or side exit
Maximum DC Contact Rating Per Pole 2.5 69 69 Operating Characteristics 250 mm/s 100 mm/min 1 x 107
Actuation Frequency, Max. 6000 operations per hr
3-Limit Switches 11-Cat. No. Index Logic Power
Vibration Shock Connection Type Color
The safety contacts are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be started.
3-142
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches

22 mm Compact Metal Position Switches
Product Selection
Operator Type Roller Plunger Dome Plunger Cross Roller Plunger
Safety 1 N.C. 1 N.C. 1 N.C.
Auxiliary 1 N.O. 1 N.O. 1 N.O.
Type Snap Acting Snap Acting Snap Acting
Panel Mount No Yes No Yes No Yes

85 75 35 0 35 75 85 0.6 mm 0 mm 2 mm 5.2 mm 5.5 mm
Bottom Cable Style

440P-ARPS11C
Side Cable Style

440P-ARPS11CS
10 (2.25) 10 (2.25) 10 (2.25)
440P-ARP1S11C 440P-ARP1S11CS 440P-ADPS11C 440P-ACRS11C 440P-ADPS11CS 440P-ACRS11CS 440P-ADP1S11C 440P-ADP1S11CS 440P-ACR1S11C 440P-ACR1S11CS
Lever
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
Snap Acting
0.7 Nm (0.62 lbin)
15 15
440P-ASLS11C
440P-ASLS11CS

Nonpanel Mount
30.4 (1.2) 20 (0.79) 7.2 (0.28) Dia. 20 (0.79) 25 (0.98) 4.2 (0.17) Dia. 37.5 (1.48) 16 (0.63) 43 (1.69) 13 (0.51) Dia. 10.5 (0.41) Dia.
Panel Mount
30.4 (1.2) M12 x 1.0 tap 7.2 (0.28) Dia. 4.2 (0.17) Dia. 37.5 (1.48) 16 (0.63) 10.5 (0.41) Dia. 3.7 (0.15) 8 (0.31) Dia.
34 (1.34) 20 (0.79) 35 (0.98)
Side cable style shows strain relief only. Units include a 2 m integral cable. Bottom cable style units have same dimensions as side cable style. Panel mount clearance hole = 13 mm (0.51 in.)
Dome Plunger
43 (1.69)
35 (1.38) 30.4 (1.2) 12 (0.47) Dia. 24 (0.94) 7.2 (0.28) Dia. 4.2 (0.17) Dia.
Countersink Hole
Two 4.2 (0.165) dia. holes Countersink: 7.2 (0.28) dia. Depth: 4.2 (0.165)
35 (1.38) 30.4 (1.2) 3.8 (0.15) 40.6 (1.6) 20 (0.79) 43 25 (0.98) (1.69)
M12 x 1.0 tap
Roller Plunger
20 (0.79) 43 25 (0.98) (1.69)
37.5 (1.48)
7.2 (0.28) Dia. 4.2 (0.17) Dia. 37.5 (1.48) 16 (0.63)
30.4 (1.2) 30.4 (1.2) 3.8 (0.15) 24 (0.94) 43 (1.69) 20 (0.79) 25 (0.98) 7.2 (0.28) Dia. 4.2 (0.17) Dia. 37.5 (1.48) 16 (0.63) 5.2 (0.2) 35.8 (1.41) 13.5 (0.53) Dia. 7.2 (0.28) Dia. 4.2 (0.17) Dia. Bottom Cable Style 35 (1.38) 16 (0.63) 12 (0.47) Dia. 3.8 (0.15) M12 x 1.0 tap 7.2 (0.28) Dia. 4.2 (0.17) Dia. 37.5 (1.48) 10.5 (0.41) Dia.
39.6 (1.56) 20 (0.79) 43 (1.69) 25 (0.98)
Cross Roller Plunger

Same Polarity BLU BLK Za BRN BLK/WHT GRN/YEL
35 (1.38)
30.4 (1.2)
25 (0.98)
Lever Type
18 (0.71) 20 (0.79) 43 (1.69) 25 (0.98)

R
3-143
Power
37.5 (1.48)
Logic
35 (1.38)
16 (0.63)
11-Cat. No. Index
35 (1.38)
16 (0.63)
35 (1.38)
3-Limit Switches
25 (0.98) 20 (0.79)
9-
Principles
General
Contact
Typical Force/Torque to Operate
Contact Opening Characteristics
Cat. No.
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches

22 mm Plastic Body
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 602041, NFPA 79, EN 1088, ISO 14119, IEC/ EN 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS 4024.1 Cat. 1 Device per EN 954-1 Dual channel limit switch suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems and used with a safety monitoring device B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. load PFHD: > 3 x10-7 MTTFd: > 385 years Dual channel limit switch may be suitable for performance levels Ple or Pld (according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according to IEC 62061) depending on application characteristics CE Marked for all applicable directives, cULus, and TV 1 N.C. snap acting, 2 N.C. or 3 N.C. slow acting 1 N.O. (except 3 N.C. versions) 10 A 600V AC 25 mA @ 5V DC 500V 1.4 A 500V 0.55 A 240V 3.0 A 250V 1.1 A 120V 6.0 A 125V 2.2 A
General Principles
9Description
These 22 mm plastic-body safety limit switches conform to EN 50047 standards and are available with snap-acting or slowbreak/make 2- or 3-contact configurations as well as a variety of actuator heads. These switches also feature an optional rotating head that can be adjusted in 90 increments before installation to allow for ease of mounting. Allen-Bradley Guardmaster limit switches can be used in guard door applications as well as on moving machine beds, crane arms, lifts, elevators, etc. Operation of these limit switches is achieved by the sliding action of a guard, or other moving object, deflecting the plunger or lever. For safety applications, it is important that upon actuation, the guard or moving object should not pass completely beyond the switch to allow the plunger or lever to return to its original positionthe plunger or lever must remain engaged by the guard or object.
Certifications Outputs Safety Contacts Auxiliary Contacts Thermal CurrentIlth Rated Insulation Voltage Switching Current @ Voltage, Min. Utilization Category A600/AC-15 N600/DC-13 Operating Characteristics Actuation Speed, Max. Actuation Speed, Min. Actuation Frequency, Max. Mechanical Life Environmental Enclosure Type Rating
(Ue) 600V (le) 1.2 A (Ue) 600V (le) 0.4 A 250 mm/s
Features
3-Limit Switches Logic Power
Large selection of actuator heads Positive operation, forced disconnection of contacts Snap-acting, slow make before break or slow break before make contact blocks Contacts 1 N.C. + 1 N.O., 2 N.C. + 1 N.O. 3 N.C. Conforms to EN 50047, EN 1088, EN 60947-5-1, EN 292 and EN 60204-1
100 mm/min 6000 operation per hour 1 x 107 IP66 -2580 (-18+176) 3 UL Approved glass-filled polybutylene terephthalate Various polymers and metals 2 x M4, Any position IEC 68-2-6 (1055 Hz, 0.35 mm amplitude) IEC 68-2-7 (30 Gn 3 pulses per axis) M20 or 1/2 inch NPT Red
Operating Examples
Cam Displacement
(A) 30
Operating Temperature [C (F)] Pollution Degree Physical Characteristics Housing Material Actuator Material Mounting Vibration
Adjustable Lever Arms

30 60 60 30 30 60 60 30
Shock Conduit Entry Color
The actuating cam should be profiled at 30 for optimum operation. Note: Plunger-type switches operate from a flat profile.
3-144
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches

22 mm Plastic Body
Product Selection
Description
Safety
Auxiliary
Type
1/2 inch NPT Conduit

0 mm 11-12 23-24 11-12 23-24 2.7 8N 4.0 6.2
M20 Conduit
Connector Style1
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
Snap acting
5N
440P-CRPS11E 440P-CRPS11B 440P-CRPS11D4

2.4
0 mm
2.1 5N
3.3
6.2
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
6N
11-12 21-22 33-34 3.0 0 mm 1.9 3.3 5N 6.2
440P-CRPB12E 440P-CRPB12B 440P-CRPB12R6
3 N.C.
5N
11-12 21-22 31-32 0 mm 2.1 5N 3.3 6.2
440P-CRPB03E 440P-CRPB03B 440P-CRPB03R6
Roller Plunger
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
MBB
6N
11-12 21-22 33-34 1.3 0 mm 11-12 23-24 11-12 23-24 2.7 7N 4.0 6.4
440P-CRPM12E 440P-CRPM12B 440P-CRPM12R6
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
Snap acting
5N
440P-CDPS11E 440P-CDPS11B 440P-CDPS11D4

2.1
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
6N
11-12 21-22 33-34 3.0 7N 0mm 0N 2.1 3.3 5N 6.4
440P-CDPB12E 440P-CDPB12B 440P-CDPB12R6
3 N.C.
5N
11-12 21-22 31-32 0 mm 0N 1.9 3.3 6.4
440P-CDPB03E 440P-CDPB03B 440P-CDPB03R6
1.3 5N
0 mm 11-12 23-24 11-12 23-24 3.5 6N 6.5 10.0
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
Snap Acting
5N
440P-CHLS11E 440P-CHLS11B 440P-CHLS11D4

2.6
0 mm
3.1 2N
5.3
10.0
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
6N
11-12 21-22 33-34 4.6
440P-CHLB12E 440P-CHLB12B 440P-CHLB12R6

2.9 2N 5.3
3 N.C.
5N
11-12 21-22 31-32

0 mm 3.0 5.3 10.0
440P-CHLB03E 440P-CHLB03B 440P-CHLB03R6
Hinge Lever
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
MBB
6N
11-12 21-22 33-34 2.5 2N
440P-CHLM12E 440P-CHLM12B 440P-CHLM12R6 889D-F4AC-2 889R-F6ECA-2
Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 4-pin, DC Micro (M12) connector. Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 6-pin, AC Micro (M12) connector.
1 D4 suffix uses a 4-pin DC Micro (M12) connector and R6 suffix uses a 6-pin AC Micro (dual keyway) consumer.

R
3-145
Power
Logic
11-Cat. No. Index
0 mm
10.0
3-Limit Switches
Dome Plunger
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
MBB
6N
11-12 21-22 33-34
440P-CDPM12E 440P-CDPM12B 440P-CDPM12R6
9-
0 mm 0N
2.0 5N
3.3
6.4
Principles
General
Contact
Cat. No.
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches

22 mm Plastic Body
Product Selection (continued)
Contact Description Safety Auxiliary Type Typical Force/Torque to Operate Contact Opening Characteristics 1/2 inch NPT Conduit
88 11-12 50 31 15 cNm 31 0 15 cNm 50 88
Cat. No. M20 Conduit Connector Style1 440P-CSLS11D4
General Principles
9-
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
Snap acting
0.15 Nm
23-24 11-12 23-24 16 16
440P-CSLS11E
440P-CSLS11B
88
27 27 47 47 10 cNm 0 10 cNm
88
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
0.14 Nm
11-12 21-22 33-34 37 37
440P-CSLB12E
27 0 27 47 10 cNm 10 cNm
440P-CSLB12B
440P-CSLB12R6
88
47
88
3 N.C.
0.14 Nm
11-12 21-22 31-32

88 47 26 0 26 47 88
440P-CSLB03E
440P-CSLB03B
440P-CSLB03R6
Short Lever Plastic Roller
11-12
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
MBB
0.14 Nm
21-22 33-34 17 10 cNm

50 31 15 cNm
440P-CSLM12E 440P-CSLM12B 440P-CSLM12R6

17 10 cNm
31 0 15 cNm 50 88
88 11-12
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
Snap acting
0.15 Nm
23-24 11-12 23-24 16 16
440P-CMHS11E 440P-CMHS11B 440P-CMHS11D4
88
27 27 47 47 10 cNm 0 10 cNm
88
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
0.14 Nm
11-12 21-22 33-34 37 37
440P-CMHB12E 440P-CMHB12B 440P-CMHB12R6

47 27 0 27 47 10 cNm 10 cNm
88
88
3 N.C.
0.14 Nm
11-12 21-22 31-32

88 47 26 0 26 47 88
440P-CMHB03E 440P-CMHB03B 440P-CMHB03R6
Short Lever Metal Roller
11-12
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
MBB
0.14 Nm
21-22 33-34 17 10 cNm 17 10 cNm
440P-CMHM12E 440P-CMHM12B 440P-CMHM12R6

4.2 5N 6.5
3-Limit Switches
Offset Hinge
0 mm 11-12
9.0
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
Snap acting
5N
23-24 11-12 23-24 3.0

0 mm 3.9 2N 5.3 9.0
440P-COHS11E
440P-COHS11B 440P-COHS11D4
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
6N
11-12 21-22 33-34 5.6
440P-COHB12E 440P-COHB12B 440P-COHB12R6

3.8 2N 5.3
0 mm
9.0
3 N.C.
5N
11-12 21-22 31-32

0 mm 11-12 4.0 5.3 9.0
440P-COHB03E 440P-COHB03B 440P-COHB03R6
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
MBB
6N
21-22 33-34 3.1 2N
440P-COHM12E 440P-COHM12B 440P-COHM12R6 889D-F4AC-2 889R-F6ACA-2
Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 4-pin, DC Micro (M12) connector. Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 6-pin, AC Micro (M12) connector.
1 D4 suffix uses a 4-pin DC Micro (M12) connector and R6 suffix uses a 6-pin AC Micro (dual keyway) consumer.
Logic Power
3-146
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches

22 mm Plastic Body
Typical Wiring Diagrams 1 Two-Circuit Type D4 4-Pin Micro Connector
Connector Pinout
11 Same Polarity 12
Terminal 1 3 2 4 11 12 23 24
Contact N.C.
2 1 3 4
23
24
N.O.
1 N.O. + 1 N.C.
Three-Circuit Type R6 6-Pin Micro Connector

3 N.C. Connector Pinout Terminal Contact N.C. N.C. N.O. 2 N.C. + 1 N.O. Terminal 11 12 21 22 31 32 N.C. Contact N.C. N.C.
6
32 22 12 31 21 11
3 N.C.
34 22 12
33 21 11
3 4
1 5 2 6 3 4
11 12 21 22 33 34
2 N.C. + 1 N.O.

11.5 (0.45) 9.3 (0.36) Dia.
17 (0.66) 4.0 (0.15) 12 (0.47)
28 (1.10)
4.0 (0.15)
90 (3.54) Max. 20 (0.78) 22 (0.86)
20 (0.78) 22 (0.86)
79 (3.11) Max.
31 (1.22)
31 (1.22)
31 (1.22)
31 (1.22)
Roller Plunger
Dome Plunger

R
3-147
Power
Logic
11-Cat. No. Index
3-Limit Switches
9-
1 See page 3-145 for positive opening circuits.
Principles
General
1 N.C. + 1 N.O.
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches

22 mm Plastic Body
15 (0.59) Dia. 5 (0.19)
41 (1.61) 17.5 (0.68) Dia.
General
38 (1.49)
4.0 (0.15)
50 (1.96)
100 (3.93) Max. 20 (0.78) 22 (0.86)
4.0 (0.15) 112 (4.4)
Principles
9-
20 (0.78) 22 (0.86)
31 (1.22)
31 (1.22)
31 (1.22)
31 (1.22)
Hinge Lever
12 (0.47) 12 (0.47) Dia.
Short Lever, Metal and Plastic Roller
3-Limit Switches Logic Power
42 (1.65) 4.0 (0.15)
103 (4.05) 17 (0.66) 20 (0.78) 22 (0.86)
31 (1.22)
31 (1.22)
Offset Hinge
3-148
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches

30 mm Metal Body
Specifications
Safety Ratings Standards
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dualchannel limit switch suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems and used with a safety monitoring device B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. load PFHD: > 3 x10-7 MTTFd: > 385 years Dual channel limit switch may be suitable for performance levels Ple or Pld (according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according to IEC 62061) depending on application characteristics CE Marked for all applicable directives, cULus, and TV 1 N.C. snap acting, 2 N.C., 3 N.C. or 4 N.C. slow acting 1 N.O., 2 N.O., or zero 600V AC 25 mA @ 5V DC 500V 1.4 A 500V 0.55 A 240V 3.0 A 250V 1.1 A 120V 6.0 A 125V 2.2 A 10 A
Description
These 30 mm metal-body safety limit switches conform to EN 50041 standards and are available in snap acting or slow break/make with 2-, 3- or 4-contact configurations. These switches feature a rotating head that can be adjusted in 90 increments before installation to allow for ease of mounting. Allen-Bradley Guardmaster can be used in guard door applications as well as on moving machine beds, crane arms, lifts, elevators, etc. Operation of these limit switches is achieved by the sliding action of a guard, or other moving object, deflecting the plunger or lever. For safety applications, it is important that upon actuation, the guard or moving object should not pass completely beyond the switch to allow the plunger or lever to return to its original positionthe plunger or lever must remain engaged by the guard or object.
Certifications Outputs Safety Contacts Auxiliary Contacts Thermal CurrentIlth Rated Insulation Voltage Switching Current @ Voltage, Min. Utilization Category A600/AC-15 N600/DC-13 Operating Characteristics Actuation Speed, Max. Actuation Speed, Min. Actuation Frequency, Max. Mechanical Life Environmental Enclosure Type Rating
Features
Large selection of actuator heads Positive operation, forced disconnection of contacts Snap-acting, slow make before break or slow break before make contact blocks Contacts 1 N.C. + 1 N.O., 2 N.C. + 2 N.O., 3 N.C. + 1 N.O., or 4 N.C. Conforms to EN 50041, EN 1088, EN 60947-5-1, EN 292 and EN 60204-1
(Ue) 600V (le) 1.2 A (Ue) 600V (le) 0.4 A 250 mm/s
100 mm/min 6000 operation per hour 1 x 107 IP66 -2580 (-18+176) 3 Die-cast alloy Various polymers and metals 2 x M5, Any position IEC 68-2-6 (1055 Hz, 0.35 amplitude) IEC 68-2-7 (30 Gn 3 pulses per axis) M20 or 1/2 inch NPT Red
Operating Examples
Cam Displacement
(A) 30
Operating Temperature [C (F)] Pollution Degree Physical Characteristics Housing Material Actuator Material Mounting
Adjustable Lever Arms

30 60 60 30 30 60 60 30
Vibration Shock Conduit Entry Color
For optimum cam operation, the actuating arm should be adjusted with a 30 offset profile. Note: Plunger-type switches operate from a flat profile.

R
3-149
Power
Logic
11-Cat. No. Index
3-Limit Switches
9-
Principles
General
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 602041, NFPA 79, EN 1088, ISO 14119, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS 4024.1
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches

30 mm Metal Body
Product Selection
Contact Description Safety 1 N.C. Auxiliary 1 N.O. Type Snap Acting Typical Force/Torque to Operate
0mm 11-12 2.3 10N 4.5 7.5
Contact Opening Characteristics 1/2 inch NPT Conduit
Cat. No. M20 Conduit Connector 1
General Principles
9-
13 N
23-24 11-12 23-24 1.3 0mm 2.0 10N 4.0 7.5
440P-MRPS11E 440P-MRPS11B 440P-MRPS11N5
4 N.C.
11 N
11-12 21-22 31-32 41-42 1.9 10N 4.0
440P-MRPB04E 440P-MRPB04B 440P-MRPB04M9
0mm 11-12
7.5
3 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
11 N
21-22 31-32 43-44 2.7 2.0 10N 4.0
0mm
7.5
Metal Roller Plunger
11-12
2 N.C.
2 N.O.
BBM
11 N
21-22 33-34 43-44 2.7 0mm 2.7 10N 4.5 7.5
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
Snap Acting
11-12
13 N
23-24 11-12 23-24 1.6 0mm 2.3 10N 4.0 7.5
440P-MDPS11E 440P-MDPS11B 440P-MDPS11N5
4 N.C.
11 N
11-12 21-22 31-32 41-42 2.3 10N 4.0
440P-MDPB04E 440P-MDPB04B 440P-MDPB04M9
0mm 11-12
7.5
3 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
11 N
21-22 31-32 43-44 3.0 2.3 10N 4.0
0mm
7.5
Metal Dome Plunger
11-12
2 N.C.
2 N.O.
BBM
11 N
21-22 33-34 43-44 3.0 83 54 35 35 cNm 35 0 35cNm 54 83
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
Snap Acting
11 -1 2
0.34 Nm
23 -2 4 11 -1 2 23 -2 4 15 83 44 15 44 83
440P-MSLS11E 440P-MSLS11B 440P-MSLS11N5
23 0 23 35cNm 10cNm
4 N.C.
0.20 Nm
11-12 21-22 31-32 41-42 23 23 44 44 35cN m 0 35cN m
440P-MSLB04E 440P-MSLB04B 440P-MSLB04M9
83 11-12
83
3 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
0.34 Nm
21-22 31-32 43-44 35 35
83
23 23 44 44 35cN m 0 35cN m
83
Metal Short Lever
11-12
2 N.C.
2 N.O.
BBM
0.34 Nm
21-22 33-34 43-44 26 26
Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 5-pin mini connector. Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 12-pin 9-wire.
1 N5 = 5-pin mini connector.
889N-F5AE-6F 889M-FX9AE-2
M9 = 12-pin M23 connector (use 9 wire).
3-150
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches

30 mm Metal Body
Product Selection (continued)
Description
Safety Contacts 1 N.C.
Auxiliary Contacts 1 N.O.
Contact Type Snap Acting
1/2 inch NPT Conduit

83 11-12 23-24 11-12 23-24 35 35 54 35cNm 0 35cNm 54 83
M20 Conduit
Connector 1
0.34 Nm
440P-MMHS11E 440P-MMHS11B 440P-MMHS11N5

15 15
21 21 44 35cNm 0 10cNm 44
4 N.C.
0.20 Nm
83 11-12 21-22 31-32 41-42
83
440P-MMHB04E 440P-MMHB04B 440P-MMHB04M9
3 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
0.34 Nm
83 11-12 21-22 31-32 43-44

26 26
83 20 20 44 35cNm 0 35cNm 44
Metal Short Lever, Metal Roller
2 N.C.
2 N.O.
BBM
0.34 Nm
83 11-12 21-22 33-34 43-44

26 26
Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 5-pin mini connector. Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 12-pin 9-wire.
1 N5 = 5-pin mini connector.
889N-F5AE-6F 889M-FX9AE-2
M9 = 12-pin M23 connector (use 9 wire).

4 N.C.
41 42 31 32 21 22 11 12
1 N.O. 1 N.C.
11 12 23 24
1 N.O. 3 N.C.
43 44 31 32 21 22 11 12
2 N.O. 2 N.C.
43 44 33 34 21 22 11 12
Same polarity this side of block
N5 Connector 2 Circuit 5-Pin Mini Connector

1 (N.C.) 11 12
23
24
Auxiliary Circuit (N.O.)
M9 12-Pin M23 Connector

4 N.C. Connector Pinout 1 3
8 7 6 5 11 4 3 9 12 10 2 1
3 N.C. 1 N.O. Contact N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. Terminal 11 12 21 22 31 32 43 44 Ground Contact N.C. N.C. N.C. N.O. Terminal 11 12 21 22 33 34 43 44
3 N.C. Contact N.C. N.C. N.O. N.O.
Terminal 11 12 21 22 31 32 41 42
4 6 7 8 9 10 12

R
3-151
Power
Logic
11-Cat. No. Index
3-Limit Switches
9-
Principles
20 20 44 35cNm 0 44 83 35cNm
General
Cat. No.
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches

30 mm Metal Body
17 (0.66) Dia. 21 (0.82)
19 (0.74)
18 (0.70) Dia.
64 (2.51) 7 (0.27)
General Principles
9-
48 (1.88)
34 (1.33)
63 (2.48)
118 (4.64) 30 (1.18) 60 (2.36)
30 (1.18) 60 (2.36)
105 (4.13)
30 (1.18) 60 (2.36) 133 (5.23)
40 (1.57)
43 (1.69)
33 (1.29)
40 (1.57)
43 (1.69)
33 (1.29)
40 (1.57)
33 (1.29) 43 (1.69)
Roller Plunger
Dome Plunger
Short Lever, (Metal & Plastic Roller)

3-152
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches

15 mm Plastic Body
Specifications
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel limit switch suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems
Imp 1
Imp 2
Description
The Imp offers safety switch performance of bigger units in the most compact case available. Designed with two mounting hole options and a choice of actuator positions, the Imp will fit in most confined spaces.
Certifications Outputs Safety Contacts
CE Marked for all applicable directives and CSA NRTL/C 1 N.C. positive break 1 N.O. 10 A (Ith) 25 mA @ 5V DC (Ue) 500V (le) 1 A (Ue) 250V (le) 0.5 A 250V 2A 24V 2A 100V 5A (Ui) 500V
Features
Positive operation, forced disconnection of contacts Contacts 1 N.C. + 1 N.O.
Auxiliary Contacts Thermal CurrentIlth Rated Insulation Voltage Switching Current @ Voltage, Min. Utilization Category AC-15 DC Operating Characteristics Actuation Speed, Max. Actuation Speed, Min. Actuator Travel, Max. Actuation Frequency, Max. Mechanical Life Electrical Life Mechanical Life Environmental Enclosure Type Rating Operating Temperature [C (F)] Pollution Degree Physical Characteristics Housing Material Actuator Material Mounting Vibration Shock Conduit Entry Color
160 mm (6.29 in.)/s 100 mm (3.93 in.)/min 5 mm (0.20 in.) 2 cycles/s 10,000,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 10,000,000 operations IP30 -2580 (-13176) 3 UL Approved glass-filled PBT Stainless steel 2 x M4 front or 2 x M3 top 1055 Hz 11 ms @ 30 g Red 3x break-outs

R
3-153
Power
Logic
11-Cat. No. Index
3-Limit Switches
9-
Principles
B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. load PFHD: > 3 x10-7 MTTFd: > 385 years Functional Safety Data 1 Dual channel limit switch may be Note: For up-to-date information, visit suitable for performance levels Ple or http://www.ab.com/Safety/ Pld (according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according to IEC 62061) depending on application characteristics
General
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, NFPA 79, EN 1088, ISO 14119, IEC/ EN 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS 4024.1
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches

15 mm Plastic Body
Product Selection
Contact Action
General Principles
9-
Actuator Type Top push roller Top push cross roller
Contact
0 mm 1 5
Conduit
Type
Cat. No.
Slow break before make
Imp 1 (roller parallel to 440P-M18001 switch front) 3 x breakouts Imp 2 (roller perpendicular to switch front)
440P-M18002
1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
11/12 23/24 2.5

10.3 (0.41) 11 (0.43) 2xM3 2.4 (0.09)
2xM4 5 mm Roller Travel 54 (2.13) 4 (0.16) 37.7 (1.48)
20 (0.79)
6 mm square knockout (not a conduit opening)
15 (0.59) 25 (0.98)
4 (0.16) 15.2 (0.6) 23.3 (0.92)
Wiring Diagrams
11 12
23
24
3-154
Safety Switches
NEMA Style Switches

802T Direct Opening Action
Specifications
Cat. 1 Device per EN 954-1 Dual channel limit switch suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems B10d = > 2 x 106 operations at min. load PFHD = > 3 x10-7 MTTFd = > 385 years Dual channel limit switch may be suitable for Performace levels Ple or Pld (according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according to IEC 62061) depending on application characteristics CE Marked for all applicable directives, cULus Listed, and TV for 2- and 4circuit models 1 N.C. snap acting or 2 N.C. snap acting
Description
The 802T Direct Opening Action limit switches have been designed for use in control reliable applications and safety applications per ISO 14119. These limit switches utilize the same mounting dimensions as other NEMA style limit switches. The rugged metal construction and plug-in body are designed for use in harsh industrial environments. Direct Opening Action allows the normally closed contacts to open when the limit switch is actuated. This opening will occur even in the event of a contact weld condition, up to 10 Newtons.
ATTENTION: To ensure that the normally closed (safety) contacts open, the limit switch actuator must be displaced beyond the point of Direct Opening Action (see specifications).
Certifications Outputs Safety Contacts Auxiliary Contacts Thermal CurrentIlth Rated Insulation Voltage Switching Current @ Voltage, Min. Utilization Category A600/AC-15
10 A 300V AC or 600V AC 500V 1.4 A 500V 0.55 A 240V 3.0 A 250V 1.1 A 120V 6.0 A 2.2 A
(Ue) 600V (le) 1.2 A (Ue) 600V (le) 0.4 A
Features
Direct opening action Snap acting contacts Rugged metal construction Long life and reliability Plug-in design NEMA 12, 13, 4, 6P/IP67 sealing
N600/DC-13 Operating Characteristics Actuation Speed, Max. Actuation Speed, Min. Actuation Frequency, Max. Mechanical Life Environmental Enclosure Type Rating Operating Temperature [C (F)] Pollution Degree Physical Characteristics Housing Material Actuator Material Mounting Vibration Shock Conduit Entry Color
200 ft/min varies with applied loading and actuation method1 200 ft/min varies with applied loading and actuation method1 8000 operations per hour 20 million cycles NEMA 4, 6P, 12, 13 and IP65/67 -18+110 (0+230) 3 Die-cast alloy Various metals or plastics 2 #10 equal length fasteners Contact fragility (102000 Hz @ 0.06 inch peak-to-peak)
Typical Applications
Machine guards Access gates and doors Cranes or hoists Transfer stations Indexing tables Robotic cells
1/2 inch NPT or M20 Grey

R
3-155
Power
Logic
Contact fragility (25 Gn 3 pulses per axis)
11-Cat. No. Index
3-Limit Switches
125V
9-
1 N.O. snap acting or 2 N.O. snap acting
Principles
General
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 602041, NFPA 79, EN 1088, ISO 14119, IEC/ EN 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS 4024.1
Safety Switches
NEMA Style Switches

AC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole, 50 or 60Hz, 2 Circuits)
NEMA Rating Designation A600 AC-15 A Max Voltage 120 240 480 600 Make 60 30 15 12 Break 6.00 3.00 1.50 1.20 Continuous Carrying Current 10 10 10 10 VA Make 7200 7200 7200 7200 Break 720 720 720 720
General Principles
9-
AC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole, 50 or 60Hz, 4 Circuits)

NEMA Rating Designation A300 A Max Voltage 120 240 Make 60 30 Break 6.00 3.00 Continuous Carrying Current 10 10 VA Make 7200 7200 Break 720 720
DC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole)

A NEMA Rating Designation Q300 DC 13 Max Voltage 250 125 Make 0.27 0.55 Break 0.27 0.55 Continuous Carrying Current 2.5 2.5 VA Make 69 69 Break 69 69
Low Voltage DC
24V DC @ 1.1 Amps resistive load

3-156
Safety Switches
NEMA Style Switches

Range of Operation
Travel to Operate Contacts
Travel to Reset
Travel to Reset
Travel to Operate Contacts Travel to Reset Contacts
Lever Type Spring Return

Max Travel
Top Push Roller Spring Return
Side Push Vertical Roller Spring Return
Side Push Horizontal Roller Spring Return
Product Selection
Travel to Torque/Force Operate to Operate Direct Direct Opening Maximum Travel to Reset Opening Action [mm Travel Contacts Action (in.)] [mm (in.)] [mm (in.)]
Number of Circuits
Lever Movement
Description
Travel to Operate Contacts [mm (in.)]
Cat. No.
2 4
Clockwise or Counter Clockwise
2 4
1 3
2 4
1 3
2 4
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
0.45 Nm (4.0 lbin), max.
Switch w/o Lever 802T-APD 13, max. 0.90 Nm (8 lbin), min. 25, min. 90 7, max. 802T-ATPD
Top Push Roller Spring Return Normal 2

1 3
1 3 5 7
Operated 28.47 Nm (6.4 lbin), max. 2.29 (0.090), min.
2 4 6 8
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
1.17 (0.046), max.
66.72 N (15.0 lb), min.
5.99 (0.236)
0.64 (0.025), max. 802T-DTPD
Side Push Vertical Roller Spring Return Normal 2

1 3
1 3 5 7
Operated
1 3 2 4
2 4 6 8
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
802T-KTPD
Side Push Horizontal Roller Spring Return 2 2 Normal

1 3
1 3 5 7
Operated
1 3 2 4
2 4
2 4 6 8
Complete Switch 802T-K1PD 24.5 Nm (5.5 lbin), max. 2.08 (0.082), max. 53.4 N (12.0 lb), min. 4.19 (0.165), min. 5.74 (0.226) 1.14 (0.045), max. 802T-K1TPD

R
3-157
Power
Modifications and Typical Leverspage 3-159.
Logic
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
11-Cat. No. Index
2 4
Complete Switch 802T-KPD 24.5 Nm (5.5 lbin), max. 2.08 (0.082), max. 53.4 N (12.0 lb), min. 4.19 (0.165), min. 5.74 (0.226) 1.14 (0.045), max.
3-Limit Switches
2 4
1 3
2 4
Complete Switch 802T-DPD
9-
Lever Type Spring Return
Principles
General
Max Travel
Max Travel
Safety Switches
NEMA Style Switches

Typical Example of a Dual Channel Safety Application
2-Circuit
4-Circuit
General Principles
9-
Negative Mode Operation Guard Closed
Positive Mode Operation
Guard Closed Aux 1

1 2 3 5 6 7 8
Aux 2
To Safety Related Part of the Machine Control System
Safety Channel 1
Safety Channel 2

14.7 (0.58) 1.2 (0.05) 19.1 (0.75) 24 (0.95) 75.8 (2.98) 70.6 (2.78) 8.7 (0.34) Dia. 59.5 (2.34) 83.7 (3.3) 20.6 (0.81)
103.4 (4.07)
3-Limit Switches
(2) #10-32 UNF-28
36.5 (1.44) 42.9 (1.69) 46.8 (1.84)
29.4 (1.16) 41.3 (1.63)
11-Cat. No. Index

34.9 (1.38)
Plug-In Switch
3.6 (0.14) 43.7 (1.72) 19.6 (0.77) 59.6 (2.35) 19.1 (0.75) 30.3 (1.19) 23.1 (0.91) 3.6 (0.14) 51.6 (2.03) 24.4 (0.96) 12.7 (0.5) 15.2 (0.60) 20.6 (0.81) 12.4 (0.49) Dia. 50.8 (2.0)
Logic Power
Lever Type Head
Top Push Roller Head
Side Push Roller Head
3-158
Safety Switches
NEMA Style Switches

Modifications Metric Conduit Entry
To order a limit switch with a 20 mm conduit entry, add the suffix S6 to the cat. no. Example: 802T-APDS6.
Micro-Style Quick-Disconnect
Pre-wired Cable
To order a factory-installed pre-wired type STOOW-A cable (5conductor), add the suffix Y plus the number of feet required. The standard cable length is 1.52 m (5 ft). Extended cable lengths are available in multiples of 1.22 m (4 ft) only. Example: To order a limit switch with a factory-installed 1.52 m (5 ft) cable, the cat. no. would become 802T-APDY5. To order a limit switch with a factory-installed 2.44 m (8 ft) cable, the cat. no. would become 802T-APDY8.
AC Micro QD
1 Same Polarity 3
1 3 5
DC Micro QD
2 Same Polarity 4
4
2 4
3
2 5 3
1
1 4
Mini-Style Quick-Disconnect
To order an 802T pre-wired limit switch with a 5-pin (2 circuit) or 9pin (4 circuit) mini connector, add the suffix J1 or J9 depending on desired wiring (J9 wiring not available for 4-circuit models) to the cat. no. Example: 802TAPDJ1.
5-Pin Mini-Type Receptacle (2 circuit)
Levers
Roller [mm (in.)] Type Material Nylon Nylon Diameter 19.05 (0.75) 19.05 (0.75) Width 7.11 (0.28) 25.4 (1.0) Cat. No. 802T-W1 802T-W1H
"J1" Wiring
2 4 5
"J9" Wiring
1
Same Polarity
Same Polarity
Steel
19.05 (0.75)
6.35 (0.25)
802T-W1A
Ball Bearing
19.05 (0.75)
5.84 (0.23)
802T-W1B
Note: Additional lever options are available in the Limit Switch section of the Sensors catalog.
9-Pin Mini-Type Receptacle (4 circuit)
"J1" Wiring ("J9" wiring not available for 4 circuit)

3 4
Same Polarity
1 2
Same Polarity
9 5
1 2 8 3
6 9 4 5

R
3-159
Power
Logic
11-Cat. No. Index
3-Limit Switches
Non-Adj. Cast Lever 38.1 mm (1.5 in.) Radius Roller on Front
9-
Principles
General
Micro quick-disconnects are available with a 5-pin 2-keyway AC or 5-pin single keyway DC. To order a limit switch with a AC micro quick-disconnect, add the suffix R5 to the cat. no. To order a limit switch with a DC micro quick-disconnect, add the suffix D5 to the cat. no. Example: 802TAPDR5 and 802TAPDD5.
Safety Switches
Notes
General Principles
9-
3-Notes 11-Cat. No. Index Logic Power

3-160

Safety Switches: Selection Criteria Prosafe Trapped Key

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Safety Switches: Selection Criteria Prosafe Trapped Key

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Safety Switches: Selection Criteria Prosafe Trapped Key

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Safety Switches

Prosafe Trapped Key

Safety Limit Switches IEC Style Switches

Guard Locking Switches

NEMA Style Switches

Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs

3-56 3-70 3-74 3-76 3-80 3-84 3-86

Sequential Access Control?

3-Interlock Switches Operator Interface Logic Power

Hard Guarding Light Guard

Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog

Sequential Access Control

High Inertia Machine (Long Run Down Time)

Other Application Considerations

Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs

Technology Overview Tongue Interlock Switches

Guard Locking Interlock Switches

3-Interlock Switches Operator Interface Logic Power

Non-Contact Interlock Switches

Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog

Technology Overview Hinge Interlock Switches

Trapped Key Switches

Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs

Elf, Cadet3, MT-GD2, 440G-MT

Trojan T15, Trojan 5, Trojan 6 (Not GD2 Models)

Operator Interface Logic Power

Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs

A large variety of tongue actuators are available:

GD2 standard actuator

Flat actuator, not to be used with metal alignment guide

GD2 flat actuator

90 actuator, not to be used with metal alignment guide

3-Interlock Switches Operator Interface Logic Power

Fully flex actuator

Fully flex actuator

Alignment guide with fully-flexible actuator

Catch and Retainer Kit

Replacement Alignment Guide

Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog

Type of Connector by Product Family

Type of Connector by Product Family (continued)

Connection to Distribution Box

Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs

1 N.C. 1 N.O. 5 A (10 A if A600) 2500V 5 mA @ 5V DC 500V 1.4 A

(Ue) 600V (le) 1.2 A (Ue) 24V (le) 2 A

3-Interlock Switches Operator Interface Logic Power

Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog

Actuator Type Flat 90

GD2 Metal alignment guide w/semi-flex actuator Flat 90

440K-E33034 440K-E33014 440K-E33080

GD2 Metal alignment guide w/semi-flex actuator

Recommended Logic Interfaces

Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs

3 (0.12) 34.5 (1.36) 36 (1.42)

Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog

Flat actuator, not to be used with metal alignment guide

90 actuator, not to be used with metal alignment guide

Metal alignment guide with semi-flexible actuator

Metal Alignment Guide